Home

User`s Manual - PLANET Technology Corporation.

1. PLANET i Networking amp Communication User s Manual Industrial Wall mounted Gigabit Ethernet Switch gt WGS 804HPT WGS 4215 8T WGS 4215 8T2S E pr Lee UE Deeg mem SE ED uad siid de T T he TE e hi EI T r a aig PS eLlTy wn Cl SC WWW PLANET com tw JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Trademarks Copyright PLANET Technology Corp 2015 Contents are subject to revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Man
2. MLD Snooping Statistics Clear Refresh Figure 4 7 33 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Total RX Display current total RX e Valid RX Display current valid RX e Invalid RX Display current invalid RX e Other RX Display current other RX e Leave RX Display current leave RX e Report RX Display current report RX e General Query RX Display current general query RX 184 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Clear Refresh Special Group Query RX Special Group amp Source Query RX Leave TX Report TX General Query TX Special Group Query TX Special Group amp Source Query TX User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Display current special group query RX Display current special group amp source query RX Display current leave TX Display current report TX Display current general query TX Display current special group query TX Display current special group amp source query TX Click to clear the MLD Snooping Statistics Click to refresh the MLD Snooping Statistics 185 b PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 7 6 Multicast Throttling Setting Multicast throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or repla
3. 331 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Figure 4 16 2 Current Power Consumption Screenshot This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings as Figure 4 16 3 shows Figure 4 16 3 Power over Ethernet Configuration Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e PoE Mode There are three modes for PoE mode B Enable enable PoE function B Disable disable PoE function B Schedule enable PoE function in schedule mode e Schedule Indicates the scheduled profile mode Possible profiles are B Profile1 B Profile2 B Profile3 B Profile4 e AF AT Mode Allows user to select 802 3at or 802 3af compatibility mode The default value is 802 3at mode This function will affect PoE power reservation in Classification power limit mode only as 802 3af mode the system is going to reserve a
4. Apply Figure 4 2 12 Logging Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Logging Service Enabled Enable logging service operation Disabled Disable logging service operation Buttons Appl PPly Click to apply changes 63 d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Logging Information Information Name Information Value Logging Service enabled Figure 4 2 13 Logging Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Logging Service Display the current logging service status 4 2 6 2 Local Log The switch system local log information is provided here The local Log screens in Figure 4 2 14 amp Figure 4 2 15 appear Local Logging Setting Target severity Select Targets Apply Figure 4 2 14 Local Log Target Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Target The target of the local log entry The following target types are supported Buffered Target the buffer of the local log B File Target the file of the local log e Severity The severity of the local log entry The following severity types are supported B emerg Emergency level of the system unstable for local log alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log crit Critical level of the critical conditions for local log error Error level of the err
5. B Set TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care RST B Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE Set TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry 2 9 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication IE B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed d
6. Built in Unique PoE Functions for Powered Devices Management As a managed PoE Switch for surveillance wireless and VoIP networks the WGS PoE managed series features special PoE Management functions B PD Alive Check B Scheduled Power Recycling B PoE Schedule BE PoE Usage Monitoring Intelligent Powered Device Alive Check The WGS PoE managed series can be configured to monitor connected PD Powered Device status in real time via ping action Once the PD stops working and responding the WGS PoE managed series will resume the PoE port power and bring the PD back to work It will greatly enhance the network reliability through the PoE port resetting the PD s power source and reducing administrator management burden PD Status PT PoE Camera No Response Good KANN AN de Ping Request as gt gt ENNP lt lt lt E Ge Ping Echo Check alive status for 3 times gr Notification PoE 4 PD Alive PoE device if without response Scheduled Power Recycling The WGS PoE managed series allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras or PoE wireless access points to reboot at a specific time each week Therefore it will reduce the chance of IP camera or AP crash resulting from buffer overflow 13 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication GI Automatically Reboot Every Friday 23 00 S M BERET BEER PoE gt gt gt ON OFF ON PoE PT Camera PoE Schedule
7. E dit Click to edit IPv6 based ACL parameter Delete Click to delete IPv6 based ACL entry 287 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 10 7 ACL Binding This page allows you to bind the Policy content to the appropriate ACLs The ACL Policy screens in Figure 4 10 13 amp Figure 4 10 14 appears ACL Binding Binding Port ACL Select Select Ports IPM Based ACL IPvE Based ACL Apply Figure 4 10 13 ACL Binding Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Binding Port Select port from this drop down list e ACL Select Select ACL list from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes ACL Binding Table Figure 4 10 14 ACL Binding Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e MAC ACL Display the current MAC ACL e IPv4 ACL Display the current IPv4 ACL e IPv6 ACL Display the current IPv6 ACL e Modify Click Edit to edit ACL binding table parameter Click Delete to delete ACL binding entry 288 r PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 11 MAC Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address i
8. Figure 4 14 1 RMON Statistics Detail Page Screenshot 319 The Page includes the following fields Networking amp Communication Object Buttons Clear Port Drop Events Octets Packets Broadcast Packets Multicast Packets CRC Alignment Errors Undersize Packets Oversize Packets Fragments Jabbers Collisions 64 Bytes Frame 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Select port from this drop down list The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets rece
9. State Disabled Link PoE In use CH RJ45 Ports SFP Ports id id Main Menu Using the onboard Web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can set up the Managed Switch by selecting the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears PLANET A User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Wetwarking amp Communication Figure 4 1 5 Managed Switch Main Functions Menu Buttons Click to save changes or reset to default LOGOUT Click to logout the Managed Switch REBOOT Click to reboot the Managed Switch d Click to refresh the page 4 1 1 Save Button This save button allows you to save the running startup backup configuration or reset switch in default parameter The screen in Figure 4 1 6 appears SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH Figure 4 1 6 Save Button Screenshot 50 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e Save Configuration to FLASH e Restore to Default User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Click to save the configuration For more detailed information please refer to chapter 4 1 2 Click to reset switch in default parameter For more detailed information please refer to chapter 4 15 1 4 1 2 Configuration Manager The system file folde
10. ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeesneeseesneeeeesseeeoesseeseeseeseeeseessoesaessoeenessenensesoneessoneneessnens 42 3 3 Web Management EE 43 3 4 SNMP based Network Management ccccccesseeeseeseeeeeesneeeseeseeeeesneeeeesneeseeeseeseagaeeseeaneeseneneeseoaneeseasneesanags 44 3 5 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility 111 lleeeeelieeeeeieeeeeeeeeee aandika nnn nnne n anne nnn nnn nn nnns 44 4 WEB CONFIGURATION 11 eeeeeeeeeeenn nennen nnne nnn nnn nnn nnn nn ENNEN nnno n nnn nnn nnn nenas 46 AMan Web An LE 49 e yA E E 50 Ae V2 Configuration I Ana EE 51 dA 1 Saving CONNU IIO ee EE 52 BZ SV SUG E 53 22 1 Syster IONS ires ene ee ie iu idndte s ran derunt een ee emn rtu rends RUE d Iu esta dI eee nee ee 53 z E elei ee en S ETT ES 54 T IPVC CONI aO EE 56 424 User ei UN ON NER 58 A BP TMe UN OS ae eer ERRE e E 59 Me Oe MS STO YIN EE 59 4252 ONTP le EE 62 A26 Log BET e nn EE 63 BZ Ol NSO AA Nolo E 63 e DL ANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication PZ oe MOA WO eaten ees tectonics H 64 42 0 3 a e ee EE 65 Aa Bere WIGS 0 NNI 67 e E SEN Le Eu EE 69 4 2 7 1 SNMP E 69 4 2 7 2 SNMP System Information ccccccccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseaeeesseeeeesseeeeseeeeessaeeeesaeeees 70 BZ oh ONIN Ee 70 A 21 Ay SNMP Access GOUD E 72
11. selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying traffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network congestion To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s The QoS page of the Managed Switch contains three types of QoS mode the 802 1p mode DSCP mode or Port base mode can be selected Both the three mode rely on predefined fields within the packet to determine the output queue B 802 1p Tag Priority Mode The output queue assignment is determined by the IEEE 802 1p VLAN priority tag E IP DSCP Mode The output queue assignment
12. ALL Enabled Disabled Ox8100 GE4 Trunk p ALL Enabled Disabled Ox8100 Enabled Disabled Ox8100 Ingress Filtering Uplink T Enabled Disabled 0x8100 Enabled Disabled 0x8100 H Lo l eo LAG Trunk ALL Enabled LAG3 ALL Enabled LAG4 ALL Enabled LAGS ALL Enabled LAGE ALL Enabled LAG Trunk st ALL Enabled Disabled 0x8100 Disabled Ox8100 Disabled spilt Disabled Oxo 100 Disabled Oxo 7100 Disabled Oxo 100 Disabled Oxo 700 Disabled spilt Disabled Uxd 100 Disabled Uxd 100 Figure 4 5 6 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Interface VLAN Mode Display the current interface VLAN mode e PVID Display the current PVID e Accepted Frame Type Display the current access frame type e Ingress Filtering Display the current ingress filtering e Uplink Display the current uplink mode e TPID Display the current TPID 123 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 5 6 Port to VLAN Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index This page allows you to add and delete port members of each VLAN The screen in Figure 4 5 7 appears Port to VLAN Settings VLAN ID 1 vl LA 52 I TUTIET erode LXxclud amp ed V lagged verme Farbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged Forbidden Excluded Tagg
13. Figure 4 14 4 RMON Event Log Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Select Index Select index from this drop down list e Index Indicates the index of the log entry e Log Time Indicates Event log time e Description Indicates the Event description 322 PLANET Networking A Communication 4 14 4 RMON Alarm User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Configure RMON Alarm table on this page The RMON Alarm screens in Figure 4 14 5 amp Figure 4 14 6 appear RMON Alarm Create New 1 552333 l DropEvents 1 214 7403647 O absolute delta 0 214 74853547 0 214 74853547 0 None Unassigned e 0 None Unassigned e 31 Charactors Figure 4 14 5 RMON Alarm Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Select Index e Index e Sample Port e Sample Variable Description Select index from this drop down list to create the new index or modify the index Indicates the index of the alarm entry Select port from this drop down list Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are B DropEvents The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources B Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits B Pkts The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received and transmitted B BroadcastPkts The to
14. LAGE 128 16 O 20000 0 20000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0D DD DD DD DD DD Auto No Disabed Disabled LAG 128 17 0720000 0 20000 2 Ji 20000 No No Auto No Disabed Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 D LAGS 128 18 0 20000 0 20000 Dn D 20000 No N Auto No Disabed Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 RER Figure 4 6 11 CIST Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e Identifier Priority Display the current identifier Priority Port ID Port ID e External Path Cost Display the current external path cost conf oper Conf Oper e Internal Path Cost Display the current internal path cost oper Conf Oper e Designated Root Display the current designated root bridge Bridge e External Root Cost Display the current external root cost e Regional Root Bridge Display the current regional root bridge e Internal Root Cost Display the current internal root cost e Designated Bridge Display the current designated bridge e Internal Port Path Cost Display the current internal port path cost e Edge Port Conf Oper Display the current edge port conf oper e P2P MAC Conf Oper Display the current P2P MAC conf oper e Port Role Display the current port role e Port State Display the current port state 156 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Net
15. Provides reports auditing and billing for services that users have accessed on the network The AAA functions require the use of configured RADIUS or TACACS servers in the network The security servers can be defined as sequential groups that are then applied as a method for controlling user access to specified services For example when the switch attempts to authenticate a user a request is sent to the first server in the defined group if there is no response the second server will be tried and so on If at any point a pass or fail is returned the process stops The Managed Switch supports the following AAA features e Accounting for IEEE 802 1X authenticated users that access the network through the Managed Switch e Accounting for users that access management interfaces on the Managed Switch through the Telnet e Accounting for commands that users enter at specific CLI privilege levels Authorization of users that access management interfaces on the Managed Switch through the Telnet To configure AAA on the Managed Switch you need to follow this general process 1 Configure RADIUS and TACACS server access parameters See Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 2 Define RADIUS and TACACS server groups to support the accounting and authorization of services 3 Define a method name for each service to which you want to apply accounting or authorization and specify the RADIUS or TACACS server groups to use Apply the
16. When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options 212 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS B Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS B Local user name and Privilege Level control 4 9 1 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is success
17. e Action Allows user to set which action will be applied if the PD is without any response The PoE Switch Series offers the following 3 actions B PD Reboot It means system will reset the PoE port that is connected to the PD B PD Reboot amp Alarm It means system will reset the PoE port and issue an alarm message via Syslog B Alarm It means system will issue an alarm message via Syslog e Reboot Time 30 180s This column allows user to set the PoE device rebooting time as there are so many kinds of PoE devices on the market and they have a different rebooting time The PD Alive check is not a defining standard so the PoE device on the market doesn t report reboot done information to the PoE Switch Thus user has to make sure how long the PD will take to finish booting and then set the time value to this column System is going to check the PD again according to the reboot time If you are not sure of the precise booting time we suggest you set it longer Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes PD Alwe Check Configuration Figure 4 15 6 PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot 338 g PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 16 Maintenance Use the Maintenance menu items to display and configure basic configurations of the Managed Switch Under maintenance the following topics are provided to back up upgrade save and restore the configuration This section
18. e MST ID Enter the special MST ID to configure path cost amp priority e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost e Internal Path Cost 0 Controls the path cost incurred by the port Auto The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes 159 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Y MST Port Status Indentifier vgl rele Priority Port SE Vu Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge Internal Path Cost LAG7 128 17 128 18 Figure 4 6 16 MST Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTIID Display the current MSTI ID e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e Identifier Priority Display the current identifier priority port ID Port ID e Internal Path Cost Display the current internal path cost configuration operation Conf Oper e Regional Root Bri
19. rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X Click to apply changes v Guest VLAN Status Disabled Dis abled Disabled Enable State In Guest VLAN pees Disabled Dis abled S S E S E S S S I Figure 4 9 8 Guest VLAN Status Page Screenshot 220 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e Port Name e Enable State e In Guest VLAN 4 9 1 5 Authenticated Host User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current state Display the current guest VLAN The Authenticated Host Table screen in Figure 4 9 9 appears Authenticated Host Table Figure 4 9 9 Authenticated Host Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e User Name e Port e Session Time e Authentication Method e MAC Address Description Display the current user name Display the current port number Display the current session time Display the current authentication method Display the current MAC address 221 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 9 2 RADIUS Server User s Manual of WGS Managed Series This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4 9 10 Figure 4 9 11 amp Figure 4 9 12 appears Use Default Parameters IP Version Time
20. Access Profile Name Priority Management Method Action Port Source IPv4 Source IPv4 Mask Source IPv6 Source IPv6 Prefix Modify Figure 4 9 30 Profile Rule Table Page Screenshot Description Display the current access profile name Display the current priority Display the current management method Display the current action Display the current port list Display the current source IPv4 address Display the current source IPv4 mask Display the current source IPv6 address Display the current source IPv6 prefix E dit Click to edit profile rule parameter Click Delete to delete profile rule entry 236 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 9 6 2 Access Rules The access profile screens in Figure 4 9 31 amp Figure 4 9 32 appear Access Profile active ODeactive Apply Figure 4 9 31 Access Profile Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Access Profile Select access profile from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Access Profiles Table Figure 4 9 32 Access Profile Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Access Profile Display the current access profile e Delete Delet Click to delete access profile entry 237 i PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 7 DHCP Snooping 4 9 7
21. Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Voice Auto Mode Configuration Auto Manual Apply Network Policy Configuration Voce 1 4094 Apply Figure 4 12 10 Voice Auto Mode Configuration and Network Policy Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e LLDP MED Policy for Voice Application e Network Policy Number e Application Type Description Set the LLDP MED policy for voice application mode Select network policy number from this drop down list Intended use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice
22. Last Topology Change Figure 4 6 14 MST Instance Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTIID Display the MSTI ID e Regional Root Bridge Display the current designated root bridge e Internal Root Cost Display the current internal root cost e Designated Bridge Display the current designated bridge e Root Port Display the current root port e Max Age Display the current max age e Forward Delay Display the current forward delay e Remaining Hops Display the current remaining hops e Last Topology Change Display the current last topology change 158 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 6 7 MST Port Setting This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are global The MSTI Ports Setting screens in Figure 4 6 15 amp Figure 4 6 16 appear MST Port Setting MST ID Port Select cae ES Apply Figure 4 6 15 MST Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description
23. No source IP address filter is specified B User Defined If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the source IP address filter you can enter a specific source IP address The legal format is xxx xxx xxx xxx A frame that hits this ACE matches this source IP address value When User Defined is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the Destination IP address filter for this ACE B Any No destination IP address filter is specified B User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the destination IP address filter you can enter a specific destination IP address The legal format is xxx xxx xxx xxx A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP address value When User Defined is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the source port for this ACE B Any No specific source port is specified source port status is don t care B Single If you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE you can enter a specific source port value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed ra
24. PLANET Networking amp Communication e Remote Server e Write Delay e Timeout Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Fill in your remote server IP address Specify the duration for which the transfer should be delayed after the binding database changes The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds The default is 300 seconds 5 minutes Specify when to stop the database transfer process after the binding database changes The range is from 0 to 86400 Use 0 for an infinite duration The default is 300 seconds 5 minutes DHCP Snooping Database Informations Database Type Mone Nene Fame Ooo S C Figure 4 9 41 DHCP Snooping Database Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Database Type e File Name e Remote Server e Write Delay e Timeout Description Display the current database type Display the current file name Display the current remote server Display the current write delay Display the current timeout 246 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 9 7 7 Rate Limit After enabling DHCP snooping the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission The DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 42 amp Figure 4 9 43 appear DHCP Rate Limit Setting Fort State Select Ports Default O User Define Unli
25. WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Revision PLANET WGS managed series User s Manual FOR MODEL WGS 804HPT WGS 4215 8T WGS 4215 8T2S REVISION 1 0 Sep 2015 Part No EM WGS managed series v1 0 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication TABLE OF CONTENTS MIN ESO DG TOON E 10 LI PAC e ue E 10 1 2 Product RT le NOM RE T TT 11 LES Row tO Use This laptetlesgeseeeseteesrercesegtedesgereengeeeg eebe 15 1 4 Product E TT 16 1 5 Product Specifications E 19 2 INS TON E 25 2 1 Hardware DSS gl OM EE 25 Pore er eu CT EE 25 e CED TACA IO E 28 E EN SCAN DIMENSIONS EE 32 22 WS CANNING TING SWC cise sea aE E E E EE E 35 2 2 1 Wall Mount Magnet Installation ccccccccceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeessaeeeeeas 35 22A DIN ral MOUNT Mol e 36 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver ccccceeccccssececcesseccceueecceececseueeecseuseecsuceeseecessaueeessuseeesaueceeseueeesseseeseuesesseneeeeas 38 EC CR e HE E E WW 41 Si REQUFEMEON S orin 41 3 2 Management Access Overview
26. amp Figure 4 5 4 appear VLAN Setting VLAN LIST VLAN Action VLAN Name Prefix Apply Figure 4 5 3 VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e VLAN Action This column allows users to add or delete VLAN s e VLAN Name Prefix Indicates the name of this particular VLAN Buttons Apply Click to apply changes VLAN Table Figure 4 5 4 VLAN Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID entry e VLAN Name Display the current VLAN ID name e VLAN Type Display the current VLAN ID type e Modify Click Edit to modify VLAN configuration 119 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 5 5 Interface Settings This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration Page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration Page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch EN IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged B Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that f
27. are not mirrored Frames received at these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Mirror Status ession ID 1 N A Figure 4 3 10 Mirroring Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Session ID Destination Port Ingress State Source TX Port Source RX Port Description Display the session ID This is the mirroring port entry Display the ingress state Display the current TX ports Display the current RX ports 91 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 3 5 Jumbo Frame This page provides to select the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port The Jumbo Frame screen in Figure 4 3 11 amp Figure 4 3 12 appear Jumbo Frame Setting Jumbo Frame d 64 9216 Apply Figure 4 3 11 Jumbo Frame Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Jumbo Frame Bytes Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 64 bytes to 9216 bytes Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes Jumbo Frame Contig Information Name Information Value Jumbo Frame Bytes 1522 Figure 4 3 12 Jumbo Frame Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Jumbo Display the current maximum frame size 92 Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 3 6 Port Error Disabled Con
28. e RX Frame Total The number of LLDP frames received on the port e RX Frame Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out e RX Frame Error The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error e RX TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded e RX TLVs The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value Unrecognized e RX Ageout Total The number of organizationally TLVs received 313 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 13 Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnostics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics
29. 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value 280 Buttons Add e PLANET Networking amp Communication Click to add ACE list IPv4 Based ACE Table User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Ee ta ra Destination IP Source IP Source IP Address E SE ort Destination Port Range IP ICMP ICMP d a dM The page includes the following fields IP Wildcard IP Wildcard Range Address Mask Address Mask Figure 4 10 8 IPv4 based ACE Table Page Screenshot Object ACL Name Sequence Action Protocol Source IP Address Source IP Address Wildcard Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Address Wildcard Mask Source Port Range Destination Port Range Flag Set DSCP IP Precedence ICMP Type ICMP Code Modify Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the current protocol Display the current source IP address Display the current source IP address wildcard mask Display the current destination IP address Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask Display the current source port range Display the current destination port range Display the current flag set Display the current DSCP Display the current IP precedence Display the current ICMP Type Display the current ICMP code E dit Click to edit IPv4 based ACL parameter Delete Click to delete IPv4 based AC
30. 2 kilometers multi mode fiber and up to 10 20 30 40 50 70 120 kilometers single mode fiber or WDM fiber They are well suited for applications within the enterprise data centers and distributions Intelligent SFP Diagnosis Mechanism The WGS 4215 8T2S supports SFP DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitor function that greatly helps network administrator to easily monitor real time parameters of the SFP such as optical output power optical input power temperature laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage 14 J PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the Managed Switch Section 6 TROUBLESHOOTING The chapter explains how to troubleshoot the Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch 15 Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 1 4 Product Features Le Physical Port HM 10 100 1000BASE T Gigabit RJ45 copper HM 100
31. 34 Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 through 128 56 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Apply Gateway DHCPv6 Client Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example 1e80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 To enable this Managed Switch to accept a configuration from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6 DHCPv6 server By default the Managed Switch does not perform DHCPv6 client actions DHCPv6 clients request the delegation of long lived prefixes that they can push to individual local hosts Pv6 Information The page includes the following fields Information Mame Auto Confiquration Information Value Enabled IPv6 In Use Address Teil Yel Act fell D B4 IPv6 In Use Router IPv6 Static Address IPv6 Static Router DHCPv6 Client Object e Auto Configuration IPv6 In Use Address IPv6 In Use Router IPv6 Static Address IPv6 Static Router DHCPv6 Client Teil Yel Actt fe00 0 7 U Disabled Figure 4 2 5 IPv6 Information Page Screenshot Description Display the current auto configuration state Display the current IPv6 in use address Display the current in use gateway Display the current IPv6 static address Display the current IP
32. Advanced Network Security The WGS managed series also provides DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection functions to prevent IP snooping from attack and discard ARP packets with invalid MAC address The network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before 12 r PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Friendly and Secure Management For efficient management the WGS managed series is equipped with Web Telnet and SNMP management interfaces With the built in Web based management interface the WGS managed series offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility By supporting the standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP the switch can be managed via any standard management software For text based management the switch can be accessed via Telnet Moreover the WGS managed series offers secure remote management by supporting SSH SSL and SNMPv3 connections which encrypt the packet content at each session Perfect Managed PoE Switch PLANET WGS PoE managed series is the new generation of PLANET Managed Gigabit PoE Switch featuring PLANET intelligent PoE functions to improve the availability of critical business applications It provides a quick safe and cost effective Power over Ethernet network solution to IP security surveillance for small businesses and enterprises
33. Apply The page includes the following fields Figure 4 5 15 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot Object e Port Select e GVRP Enabled e Registration Mode e VLAN Creation Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Description Select port from this drop down list to assign protocol VLAN port Controls whether GVRP is enabled or disabled on port By default GVRP ports are in normal registration mode These ports use GVRP join messages from neighboring switches to prune the VLANs running across the 802 1Q trunk link If the device on the other side is not capable of sending GVRP messages or if you do not want to allow the switch to prune any of the VLANs use the fixed mode Fixed mode ports will forward for all VLANs that exist in the switch database Ports in forbidden mode forward only for VLAN 1 GVRP can dynamically create VLANs on switches for trunking purposes By enabling GVRP dynamic VLAN creation a switch will add VLANs to its database when it receives GVRP join messages about VLANs it does not have 131 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication GVRP Port Status State Disabled GE4 LAG Disabled Normal Enabled Figure 4 5 16 GVRP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Enable Status Display the current GVRP port state e Registration Mode Disp
34. Authentication Network Control Standards Compliance IEEE 802 1ab LLDP IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 2236 IGMP v2 RFC 3376 IGMP v3 RFC 2710 MLD v1 RFC 3810 MLD v2 Environment Operatin Temperature 0 50 degrees C i 2 Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Storaae Temperature 20 70 degrees C i Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing 24 r PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount For easier management and control of the Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch please read this chapter completely 2 1 Hardware Description 2 1 1 Switch Front Panel The front panel provides a simple interface monitoring of the Managed Switch Figure 2 1 1a Figure 2 1 1c show the front panel of the Managed Switch GS 804HPT Front Panel Data Power PoE Power PoE In Use Usage W Ke LNK ACT 120 90 EI MEN PLANET PWR Networking amp Communication Industrial 8 Port Gigabit Managed Switch with A Port PoE 4e 1000 DC Input R
35. Buttons 170 b PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Add Click to add IGMP router port entry IGMP Static Groups Figure 4 7 13 IGMP Static Groups Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Group IP Address Display the current group IP address e Member Ports Display the current member ports e Modify s Edit Click to edit parameter 4 7 2 4 IGMP Group Table This page provides Multicast Database The IGMP Group Table screen in Figure 4 7 14 appears IGMP Group Table Figure 4 7 14 IGMP Group Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VID e Group IP Address Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service e Member Port Display the current member port e Type Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic depending on selected options e Life Sec Display the current life 171 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 7 2 5 IGMP Router Setting Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your Managed Switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all th
36. Counters Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Mode Select port counters mode Option All e Interface e Ether link e RMON 84 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Interface Counters Counters Value Received Octets Received Unicast Packets Received Unknown Unicast Packets Received Discards Packets Transmit Octets Transmit Unicast Packets Transmit Unknown Unicast Packets Transmit Discards Packets Received Multicast Packets Received Broadcast Packets Transmit Multicast Packets Transmit Broadcast Packets Figure 4 3 4 Interface Counters Page Screenshot Object Description e Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters e Received Unicast The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Packets Received Unknown Unicast Packets Received Discards Packets Transmit Octets Transmit Unicast Packets Transmit Unknown Unicast Packets Transmit Discards Packets Received Multicast Packets The number of packets received via the interface which is discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possi
37. IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers B The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header B 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 b
38. IP source guard filters packets based on the following types of binding entries Bl IP port binding entry E MAC port binding entry B IP MAC port binding entry IP Source Guard Overview DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard DHCP Trust Port DHCP Client A Invader A DR o mm 258 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 9 1 Port Settings IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host The IP Source Guard Port Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 60 amp Figure 4 9 61 appear IESSE source Guard Port Setting Status Verity Source Max Binding Entry Apply Figure 4 9 60 IP Source Guard Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Status Enable or disable the IP source guard e Verify Source Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based IP address or IP address and MAC address B None Disables IP source guard filtering on the Managed Switch B IP Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses stored in the binding table B IP and MAC Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses and correspondin
39. LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is active for the port LLDP MED Fast Start is critical to the timely startup of LLDP and therefore integral to the rapid availability of Emergency Call Service LLDP Enabled Enabled LLOP POU Disable Action Flooding 4 Holdtme Multiplier Config Name Config Value Reinitialization Delay Transmit Delay LLOP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Figure 4 12 2 LLDP Global Config Page Screenshot 297 The page includes the following fields e PLANET Networking amp Communication Object LLDP Enable LLDP PDU Disable Action Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier Reinitialization Delay Transmit Delay LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count 4 12 3 LLDP Port Setting User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Display the current LLDP status Display the current LLDP PDU disable action Display the current transmission interval Display the current holdtime multiplier Display the current reinitialization delay Display the current transmit delay Display the current LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Use the LLDP Port Setting to specify the message attributes for individual interfaces including whether messages are transmitted received or both transmitted and received The LLDP Port Configuration and Status screens in Figure 4 12 3 amp Figure 4 12 4 appear The page includes the following fields LLDP Port Configuration Apply Optional TLVs Selection Port Select Optiona
40. Limit Kbps CH Baw CH cp esa k Que H Rate Unit pl te H E Figure 4 8 21 Egress Queue Status Page Screenshot 205 y PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue ID Display the current queue ID e Rate Limit Kbps Display the current rate limit 4 8 5 Voice VLAN 4 5 8 1 Introduction to Voice VLAN Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page Voice VLAN is specially configured for the user voice data traffic By setting a Voice VLAN and adding the ports of the connected voice equipments to Voice VLAN the user will be able to configure QoS Quality of service service for voice data and improve voice data traffic transmission priority to ensure the calling quality The switch can judge if the data traffic is the voice data traffic from specified equipment according to the source MAC address field of the data packet entering the port The packet with the source MAC address complying with the system defined voice equipment OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier will be considered the voice data traffic and transmitted to the Voice VLAN The configuration is based on MAC address acquiring a mechanism in which every voice equipment transmitting information through the network has got its unique MAC address VLAN will trace the address belongs to specified MAC By This means VLAN allows th
41. Membership Table Port Mode Administrative VLANs Operational VLANs Modify The page includes the following fields Figure 4 5 8 Port VLAN Membership Table Page Screenshot Object Port Mode Administrative VLANs Operational VLANs Modify Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current VLAN mode Display the current administrative VLANs Display the current operational VLANs E dit Click to modify VLAN membership 125 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 5 8 Protocol VLAN Group Setting The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this Managed Switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets Command Usage To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use Although not mandatory we suggest co
42. OBy name 812 65555 813 D 65535 Use Default r Use Default 0 65535 1 30 secs 1 10 0 2000 OLogin O802 1X All Figure 4 9 11 New Radius Server Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Server Definition e Server IP e Authentication Port e Acct Port e Key String e Timeout for Reply e Retries Description Set the server definition Address of the Radius server IP name The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server The shared key shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch The Timeout which can be set to a number between 1 and 30 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before i
43. ODon t Care Syn Set Ounset ODon t Care Fin amp Set Ounset Don t Care Any ODSCP to match EI Range D 63 OIP Precedence to match Range 7 9 Any Select fram list Echo Bech O Protocol ID to match Range 0 266 Any O User Defined Range D 255 Figure 4 10 7 IP based ACE Page Screenshot 277 Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e ACL Name e Sequence e Action e Protocol e Source IP Address e Source IP Address Value e Source IP Wildcard Mask e Destination IP Address e Destination IP Address Value e Destination IP Wildcard Mask e Source Port User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Select ACL name from this drop down list Set the ACL sequence Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE B Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned B Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped B Shutdown Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE Specify the protocol filter for this ACE B Any IP No protocol filter is specified B Select from list f you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and select protocol from this drop down list B Protocol ID to match If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and set current protocol ID Specify the Source IP address filter for this ACE B Any
44. Page This Page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed wavelength optical output power optical input power temperature laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage in real time You can also use the hyperlink of port no to check the statistics on a specific interface 4 3 10 1 SFP Module Status The SFP Module Status screens in Figure 4 3 20 amp Figure 4 3 21 appear Port Fiber Status Port Selected Figure 4 3 20 Port Selected Page Screenshot with Sample Switch 99 PLANET Wetwarking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list GETT Fiber Port Status Fiber Type single Mode Eth Compliance 100DBASE LX Se a T TX Distance Wave Length SANOANOCNOC OC Ce EE Vendor SN S11 3131 1312312 Figure 4 3 21 Fiber Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e OE Present Display the current SFP OE present e LOS Display the current SFP LOS 100 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 3 10 1 SFP Module Detail Status The SFP Module Detail Status screen in Figure 4 3 22 appears Status Table Figure 4 3 22 SFP Module Detail Status Page Screenshot with Sample Switch The page includes th
45. Sets the Router port type The types of Router port as below Static Forbid e Static Ports Select Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier e Forbid Port Select Specify which ports un act as router ports Buttons Add Click to add MLD router port entry Y MLD Router Ports Status Figure 4 7 28 Router Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Static Ports Display the current static ports e Forbidden Ports Display the current forbidden ports e Modify E dit Click to edit parameter Click Delete to delete the group ID entry 181 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 7 4 5 MLD Router Table This page provides Router Table The Dynamic Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4 7 29 Figure 4 7 30 amp Figure 4 7 31 appear Dynamic Router Table Figure 4 7 29 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Display the current dynamic router ports e Expiry Time Sec Display the current expiry time Static Router Table Figure 4 7 30 Static Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 1 e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Dis
46. TFTP client 17 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series r PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment Mi System Maintenance Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP Configuration upload download through Web interface Dual Images Hardware reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default SNTP Network Time Protocol Cable Diagnostics Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Protocol and LLDP MED SNMP trap for interface Link Up and Link Down notification Event message logging to remote Syslog server Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events PLANET Smart Discovery Utility Smart fan with speed control 18 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 1 5 Product Specifications WGS 804HPT WGS 804HPT Hardware Specifications Copper Ports PoE Inject Port Switch Architecture Switch Throughput 64 bytes MAG Address Table Shared Data Buffer IEEE 802 3x pause frame for full duplex Flow Control Back pressure for half duplex Jumbo Frame 10 Kbytes lt 5 sec System reboot Reset Button gt 5 sec Factory default Power LED Power Green PoE Power Usage LED 30W 60W 90W 120W Green PoE Port Port 1 to Port 4 PoE in Use Orange LNK ACT Green 10 100 1000BASE TX Port Port 5 to Port 8 1000 Green LNK ACT Green LED Connector B Removable 3
47. are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items Cable Diagnostics Ping Test IPv6 Ping Test Trace Route 4 13 1 Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics performs tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two statuses as follow B if the link is established on the twisted pair interface in 1000Base T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer B if the link is established in 100Base TX or 10Base T the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running After the diagnostics are finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are available B Coupling between cable pairs B Cable pair termination B Cable Length Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length from 15 to 100 meters 314 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The Copper test and test result screens in Figure 4 13 1 amp Figure 4 13 2 appear select the port on which to run the copper test Copper Test Figure 4 13 1 Copper Test Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list Port Channel A CableLengthA Chann
48. between the isolated ports and a lone promiscuous port Unprotected A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN This is the default setting Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes Protected Ports Status Protected Type Protected Parts Figure 4 3 17 Port Isolation Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Protected Ports Display the current protected ports e Unprotected Ports Display the current unprotected ports 97 e PLANET i User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 3 9 EEE What is EEE EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is low or no traffic utilization EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange wakeup time information using the LLDP protocol EEE works for ports in auto negotiation mode where the port is negotiated to either 1G or 100 Mbit full duplex mode For ports that are not EEE capable the corresponding EEE checkboxes are
49. current query max response interval Display the current last member query count Display the current last member query interval Display the current immediate leave E dit Click to edit parameter 178 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 7 4 2 MLD Static Group The MLD Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4 7 24 amp Figure 4 7 25 appear Add Mild Static Group Gu al ml tr ARE FP P gu inr am A al ele m E Fg sax we E pi um M L AM I L ka LF LJ IF f 8 if 5 h ji LLI b j F i LU rts Add Figure 4 7 24 Add MLD Static Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list e Group IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service e Member Ports Select port number from this drop down list Buttons Add Click to add IGMP router port entry MLD Static Groups Figure 4 7 25 MLD Static Groups Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Group IPv6 Address Display the current group IPv6 address e Member Ports Display the current member ports e Modify E dit Click to edit parameter 179 d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 7 4 3 MLD Group Table This page provides MLD Group Table The MLD Group Table
50. disable DoS check mode by smurf attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP min hdr size Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn sport 1024 Enable or disable DoS check mode by null scan attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by x mas scan attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn fin attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn rst attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP fragment offset 1 265 PLANET Wetwarking amp Communication DoS Informations Information Name IMAC SMAC Land Attack UDP Blat TCP Blat POD Ping of Death IPv6 Min Fragment Size ICMP Fragment Packets Enabled IPv4 Ping Max Packet Size IPv6 Ping Max Packet Size Smurf Attack TCP Min Header Length TCP Syn SPORT 1024 Null Scan Attack X Mas Scan Attack TCP SYN FIN Attack TCP SYN RST Attack TCP Fragment Offset 1 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Information Value l Enabled Netmask Length D Figure 4 9 67 DoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object DMAC SMAC Land Attach UDP Blat TCP Blat POD IPv6 Min Fragment ICMP Fragments IPv4 Ping Max Size IPv6 Ping Max Size Smurf Attack TCP Min Header Length TCP SYN SPORT 1024 Null Scan Attack X mas Scan Attack TCP SYN FIN Attack TCP SYN RST Attack TCP Fragment Offset 1 Description Display the current DMAC SMAC status Display the current la
51. drop down list e State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled e Rate Kbps Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes Egress Bandwidth Control Status 3 off Figure 4 8 19 Egress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot 204 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Egress Rate Limit Kbps Display the current egress rate limit 4 8 4 3 Egress Queue The Egress Queue Bandwidth Control Settings and Status screens in Figure 4 8 20 amp Figure 4 8 21 appear Egress Queue Bandwidth Control Settings Queue Port State CIRIKbps Port state CIR K bps GDpisable OEnable 01000000 musta multiple of 18 Apply Figure 4 8 20 Egress Queue Bandwidth Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Queue Select queue number from this drop down list e State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled e CIR Kbps Configure the CIR for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes GE1 Egress Per Queue Status Rate
52. each MST instance setting E MST Port Setting Configuration per port MST setting m STP Statistics Display the STP statistics 147 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 6 2 STP Global Settings This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatiable Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree The STP Global Settings screens in Figure 4 6 4 amp Figure 4 6 5 appear Global Setting Enabled OEnahled 9 Disabled BPDU Forward flooding filtering PathCost Method Oshart long Force Version RSTP Operation kl Configuration Name OOOO 30 4F 1122 Max s2 charactor Configuration Revision oO 552353 Apply Figure 4 6 4 Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following field
53. enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Description Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address 143 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of a received BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU
54. fall IEC 60068 2 27 shock IEC 60068 2 6 vibration IEEE 802 3 10BASE T IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX 100BASE FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000BASE T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back Pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port Trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of Service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 2236 IGMP v2 Standards Compliance 21 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication RFC 3376 IGMP v3 RFC 2710 MLD v1 RFC 3810 MLD v2 Environment Temperature 40 75 degrees C Operating u Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Temperature 40 75 degrees C Storage Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing WGS 4215 8T WGS 4215 8T2S Product WGS 4215 8 WGS 4215 8T25 Hardware Specifications Copper Ports 8 x 10 100 1000BASE T RJ45 auto MDI MDI X ports 2 x 100 1000BASE X SFP interfaces SFP mini GBIC Slots Supports 100 1000Mbps dual mode and DDM Switch Fabric 16Gbps non blocking 20G bps non blocking 14 8Mpps IEEE 802 3x pause frame for full duplex Flow Control Back pressure for half duplex lt 5 sec System reboot Reset Button gt 5 sec Factory defaul
55. fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type Toconnect to 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver please use the single mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type Connect the Fiber Cable Insert the duplex LC connector into the SFP transceiver Connect the other end of the cable to a device with SFP transceiver installed Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link fails To function with some fiber NICs or media converters user has to set the port Link mode to 1000 Force or 100 Force Remove the Transceiver Module Make sure there is no network activity anymore Remove the fiber optic cable gently Lift up the lever of the MGB module and turn it to a horizontal position Pull out the module gently through the lever MGB SX LX Figure 2 1 8 How to Pull Out the SFP Transceiver Never pull out the module without lifting up the lever of the module and turning it into a horizontal position Directly pulling out the module could damage the module and the SFP module slot of the Managed Switch 40 PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch It describes the types of manag
56. for Energy Saving Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to environmental protection the WGS PoE managed series can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power The PoE schedule function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMBs or enterprises save power and money It also increases security by powering off PDs that should not be in use during non business hours ah Q 3 Thy BAM WK Era Bi zal Power Power Power Power Power Pre CHT OHT CHT Cmn On On G Watts E Watts 12 Watts 12 Watts amp Watts D Watts 12 Watts 12 Watts Save 24 watts hr during off business hours IESU cere eee UT EROR Total Saved 10800 Watts month vc o00Base T UTP with PoE PoE Usage Monitoring Via the power usage chart in the web management interface the WGS PoE managed series enables the administrator to monitor the status of the power usage of the connected PDs in real time Thus it greatly enhances the management efficiency of the facilities Flexibility and Extension Solution The WGS 4215 8T2S provides two dual speed fiber SFP slots it can also connect with the 100BASE FX 1000Base SX LX SFP Small Form factor Pluggable fiber transceiver and then to backbone switch and monitoring center over a long distance The distance can be extended from 550 meters to
57. function This section has the following items E LAG Setting Configures load balance algorithm configuration settings B LAG Management Configures LAG configuration settings B LAG Port Setting Configures LAG port settings E LACP Setting Configures LACP priority settings B LACP Port Setting Configure LACP configuration settings B LAG Status Display LAG status LACP information 103 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Wetworking amp Communication 4 4 1 LAG Setting This page allows configuring load balance algorithm configuration settings The LAG Setting screens in Figure 4 4 2 amp Figure 4 4 3 appear LAG Setting MAC Address OIP MAC Address Apply Figure 4 4 2 LAG Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Load Balance Select load balance algorithm mode Algorithm B MAC Address The MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the frame B IP MAC Address The IP and MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the frame Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes LAG Information Figure 4 4 3 LAG Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Load Balance Display the current load balance algorithm Algorithm 104 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 4 2 LAG Management This page is used to configure the LAG management The LAG Management screens in Figure 4 4 4
58. has the following items Mi Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page B Reboot Switch You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot normally B Backup Manager You can back up the switch configuration Mi Upgrade Manager You can upgrade the switch configuration B Dual Image Select active or backup image on this Page 4 16 1 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears and click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Restore Figure 4 15 1 Factory Default Page Screenshot After the Factory button is pressed and rebooted the system will load the default IP settings as follows Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 The other setting value is back to disable or none To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device be rebooted You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx 339 b PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 16 2 Reboot Switch The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a r
59. highest priority and is selected as the active LACP peer of the trunk group Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes LACP Information system Priority 32r lite Figure 4 4 9 LACP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Priority Display the current system priority 108 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Wetwarking amp Communication 4 4 5 LACP Port Setting This page is used to configure the LACP port setting The LACP Port Setting screens in Figure 4 4 10 amp Figure 4 4 11 appear LACP Port Settings Port Select Priority Timeout Apply Figure 4 4 10 LACP Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list to set LACP port setting e Priority The Priority controls the priority of the port If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role Lower number means greater priority e Timeout The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions Short will transmit LACP packets each second while Long will wait for 30 seconds before sending an LACP packet Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes v LACP Port Information Figure 4 4 11 LACP Port Information Page Screenshot
60. is included in LLDP information transmitted 802 1 PVID When checked the 802 1 PVID is included in LLDP information transmitted Figure 4 12 4 LLDP Port Status Page Screenshot 299 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e State Display the current LLDP status e Selected Optional Display the current selected optional TLVs TLVs The VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection and LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status screens in Figure 4 12 5 amp Figure 4 12 6 appear VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection Port ct VLAM Select Apply Figure 4 12 5 VLAN Name TLV Selection Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e VLAN Select Select VLAN from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status Selected VLAN Figure 4 12 6 LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status Page Screenshot 300 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Selected VLAN Display the current selected VLAN 4 12 4 LLDP Local Device Use the LLDP Local Device Information screen to display information about the switch such as its MAC address chassi
61. is determined by the TOS or DSCP field in the IP packets E Port Base Priority Mode Any packet received from the specify high priority port will treated as a high priority packet The Managed Switch supports eight priority level queue the queue service rate is based on the WRR Weight Round Robin and WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing alorithm The WRR ratio of high priority and low priority can be set to 4 1 and 8 1 192 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 8 2 General 4 8 2 1 QoS Properties The QoS Global Setting and Information screen in Figure 4 8 1 amp Figure 4 8 2 appear Disable Basic QoS Global Setting Apply Figure 4 8 1 QoS Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Mode Enable or disable QoS mode Buttons Apply Click to apply changes QoS Information 005 Informations Information Name Information Value Figure 4 8 2 QoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Mode Display the current QoS mode 193 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 8 2 2 QoS Port Settings The QoS Port Settings and Status screen in Figure 4 8 2 amp Figure 4 8 3 appear Port Port Settings ecedence Disable OQ Enable CoS Value F Remark DSCP pem emi a E n CH Mee E A S EE ieee E
62. is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports STP calculates path costs and selects the 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet path with the minimum cost as the active ports path 0 Auto Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Default Value Enable state STP disabled for all ports Port priority 128 Port cost 0 Bridge Priority 32 768 User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority 144 r PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is t
63. link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 8 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Managed Switch supports Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 8 groups If the group is defined as an LACP static link aggregation group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregation group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports Use the Link Aggregation Menu to display or configure the Trunk
64. media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as 305 e PLANET Networking amp Communication e VLAN ID e Tag e L2 Priority e DSCP User s Manual of WGS Managed Series those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services App Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Vi
65. menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items B System Information The switch system information is provided here B IP Configurations Configure the switch managed IP information on this page B IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page B User Configuration Configure new user name and password on this page B Time Settings Configure SNTP on this page NE Log Management The switch log information is provided here NE SNMP Management Configure SNMP on this page 4 2 1 System Information The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screens in Figure 4 2 1 amp Figure 4 2 2 appear System Information System Name Edit Managed Switch System Contact Edit Default Contact MAC Address 00 30 4F 00 00 00 IP Address 1927 168 0 700 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Loader Date Apr 16 2014 14 5 1 06 1 0b140417 Firmware Date Wed May 7 15 41 06 UZT 2014 System Object ID 1 3 5 1 4 1 10455 1 1503 System Up Time U days 2 hours 6 mins 32 secs PCB HW Version V1 Figure 4 2 1 System Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e S
66. method names to port or line interfaces This guide assumes that RADIUS and TACACS servers have already been configured to support AAA The configuration of RADIUS and TACACS server software is beyond the scope of this guide refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS or TACACS server software 227 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 4 1 Login List This page is to login list parameters The authentication list screen in Figure 4 9 17 amp Figure 4 9 18 appears New Authentication List List Name Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 CO e e mter Mee s Add Figure 4 9 17 New Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Defines a name for the authentication list e Method 1 4 Set the login authentication method Empty None Local TACACS RADIUS Enable Buttons Add l DEMNM Click to add authentication list Login Authentication Lists a O u Figure 4 9 18 Login Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Display the current list name e Method List Display the current method list e Modify Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 228 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communicatio
67. mirror many to 1 Mi Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops 16 Networking amp Communication Quality of Service B Ingress Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control B Storm Control support Broadcast Unknown unicast Unknown multicast B Traffic classification EEE 802 1p CoS TOS DSCP IP Precedence of IPv4 IPv6 packets WW Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Multicast Mi Supports IGMP Snooping v2 and v3 Supports MLD Snooping v1 v2 IGMP Querier mode support IGMP Snooping port filtering MLD Snooping port filtering Security B Authentication IEEE 802 1X Port based network access authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with the RADIUS servers RADIUS TACACS login user access authentication B Access Control List Pv4 IPv6 IP based ACL MAC based ACL MAC Security Static MAC MAC Filtering Port Security for Source MAC address entries filtering DHCP Snooping to filter distrusted DHCP messages Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks DoS Attack Prevention SSH SSL Management Mi IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack management Mi Switch Management Interface Web switch management Telnet Command Line Interface SNMP v1 v2c and v3 SSH SSL secure access Mi User Privilege Levels Control HM Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol
68. pin terminal block for power input Pin 1 2 for Power Pin 1 V Pin 2 V Pin 3 for earth ground B DC power jack with 2 0mm central pole Power Requirements 48 56V DC 3A max Power Consumption Max 152 watts 519 BTU Dissipation Dimensions W x D x H 148 x 25 x 134 mm 532g ESD Protection 6KV DC Enclosure Mea Power over Ethernet PoE Power Output IEEE 802 3af Standard Per port 48V 56V DC depending on the power supply max 15 4 watts IEEE 802 3at Standard 19 PLANET Networking amp Communication BEEN Per port 50V 56V DC depending on the power supply max 36 watts 12 3l8 144 watts depending on power input Layer 2 Functions User s Manual of WGS Managed Series TX RX Both Port Mirrorin S Many to 1 monitor 802 1Q tagged based VLAN Up to 256 VLAN groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs 802 1ad Q in Q tunneling VLAN stacking Voice VLAN Protocol VLAN Private VLAN Protected port GVRP Management VLAN IEEE 802 3ad LACP and static trunk Link Aggregation l Supports 4 groups with 4 ports per trunk STP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol STP BPDU Guard BPDU Filtering and BPDU Forwarding IPv4 IGMP v2 v3 snooping IGMP Snooping IGMP querier Up to 256 multicast groups IPv4 IPv6 IP based ACL MAC based ACL IPv4 IPv6 IP based ACE MAC based ACE 8 mappi
69. port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media This applies to physical ports only Aggregations are always forced Point2Point If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUS including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUS it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check 150 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled Buttons Apply Click to apply changes By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 65 535 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Hal
70. related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes Enable Link nial FlowCtrl FlowCtrl p State Status P P Config Status Em Enabled us A 000M A Full Disabled Disabled eee as eee oem aw a oe eme es re ee oem nm m omm me ee as emer oem nm Jm foom eme ser ee eme oem ae ae EC ees as eene oem aw m peer eme Figure 4 3 2 Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 83 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET W s User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Description Click E dit to indicate the port name e Enable State Display the current port state e Link Status Display the current link status e Speed Display the current speed status of the port e Duplex Display the current duplex status of the port e Flow Control Display the current flow control configuration of the port Configuration e Flow Control Status Display the current flow control status of the port 4 3 2 Port Counters This page provides an overview of traffic and trunk statistics for all switch ports The Port Statistics screens in Figure 4 3 3 Figure 4 3 4 Figure 4 3 5 amp Figure 4 3 6 appear Port MIB Counters Settings GEI Y Gal COlntemace C Etherlike ORMON Figure 4 3 3 Port MIB
71. such as videoconferencing VLANS provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices 114 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication B IEEE 802 1Q Standard IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging B The untagging feature of
72. switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 145 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Wetworking amp Communication A LAN1 Port cost 200 000 A Bridge ID 15 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 dea c Br
73. syslog facility e Action Delete Delete the remote server entry 4 2 6 4 Log Message The switch log view is provided here The Log View screens in Figure 4 2 18 Figure 4 2 19 amp Figure 4 2 20 appear Logging Filter Select Severity Category buffered sei Select Levels Select Categories View Figure 4 2 18 Log Information Select Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Target The target of the log view entry The following target types are supported B Buffered Target the buffered of the log view E File Target the file of the log view e Severity The severity of the log view entry The following severity types are supported B emerg Emergency level of the system unstable for log view alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for log view crit Critical level of the critical conditions for log view error Error level of the error conditions for log view warning Warning level of the warning conditions for log view notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for log view info Informational level of the informational messages for log view debug Debug level of the debugging messages for log view e Category The category of the log view includes AAA ACL CABLE DIAG DAI DHCP SNOOPING Dot1X GVRP IGMP SNOOPING IPSG L2 LLDP Mirror MLD SNOOPING Platform PM Port PORT SECURITY QoS Rate SNMP and STP Buttons View Click to v
74. table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Remove Device screen in Figure 4 12 9 appears LLDP Remote Device Detail Delete Retresh Figure 4 12 9 LLDP Remote Device Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Local Port Display the current local port e Chassis ID Subtype Display the current chassis ID subtype e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Port ID Subtype Display the current port ID subtype e Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Time to Live Display the current time to live Buttons Delete Click to delete LLDP remove device entry Retresh l l Click to refresh LLDP remove device 303 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 12 6 MED Network Policy Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy require
75. the management VLAN E Create VLAN Creates the VLAN group E Interface Settings Configures mode and PVID on the VLAN port a Port to VLAN Configures the VLAN membership E Port VLAN Membership Display the VLAN membership z Protocol VLAN Group Configures the protocol VLAN group Setting E Protocol VLAN Port Configures the protocol VLAN port setting Setting a GVRP Setting Configures GVRP global setting m GVRP Port Setting Configures GVRP port setting S GVRP VLAN Display the GVRP VLAN database B GVRP Statistics Display the GVRP port statistics 4 5 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications
76. to Possible security models are SI Noauth None authentication and none privacy security levels are assigned to the group a auth Authentication and none privacy E priv Authentication and privacy Note The Security Level applies to SNNPv3 only 72 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication e Read View Name Read view name is the name of the view in which you can only view the contents of the agent The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Write View Name Write view name is the name of the view in which you enter data and configure the contents of the agent The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Notify View Name Notify view name is the name of the view in which you specify a notify inform or trap Buttons Add Click to add a new access entry RENE Check to delete the entry Access Group Status Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Action Figure 4 2 26 SNMP View Table Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name Display the current SNMP access group name e Security Model Display the current security model e Security Level Display the current security level e Read View Name Display the current read view name e Write View Name Display the current write view name e Notify View Name Display the current notify view name e Action Delete Delete the access group entry Use
77. 1 DHCP Snooping Overview The addresses assigned to DHCP clients on unsecure ports can be carefully controlled using the dynamic bindings registered with DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port DHCP pn Overview VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address 192 168 0 1 00 30 4F 11 22 33 2 192 168 0 2 00 11 22 55 AA BB DHCP Client 1 DHCP Trust Port i 00 30 4F 11 22 33 sii Client EP a Command Usage B Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received on a non secure interface from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally and enabled on a VLAN interface DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped m Table entries are only learned for trusted interfaces An entry is added or removed dynamically to the DHCP snooping table when a client receives or releases an IP address from a DHCP server Each entry includes a MAC address IP address lease time VLAN identifier and port identifier m When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned
78. 1000BASE X mini GBIC SFP slots WGS 4215 8T2S only Power over Ethernet WGS PoE managed series Complies with IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet End span PSE Complies with IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet End span PSE IEEE 802 3af 802 3at devices powered Supports PoE Power up to 36 watts for each PoE port Auto detects powered device PD Circuit protection prevents power interference between ports Remote power feeding up to 100 meters PoE Management Total PoE power budget control Per port PoE function enable disable PoE Port Power feeding priority Per PoE port power limitation PD classification detection PD alive check PoE schedule Layer 2 Features Mi Prevents packet loss with back pressure half duplex and IEEE 802 3x pause frame flow control full duplex B High performance Store and Forward architecture broadcast storm control runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth B Supports VLAN IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Protocol VLAN Voice VLAN Private VLAN Management VLAN GVRP B Supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol STP BPDU Guard BPDU Filtering and BPDU Forwarding B Supports Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel static trunk WW Provides port
79. 109 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Name The switch port number of the logical port e Priority Display the current LACP priority parameter e Timeout Display the current timeout parameter 4 4 6 LAG Status This page displays LAG status The LAG Status screens in Figure 4 4 12 amp Figure 4 4 13 appear LAG Status LAGA E Mat Present Figure 4 4 12 LAG Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG Display the current trunk entry e Name Display the current LAG name e Type Display the current trunk type e Link State Display the current link state e Active Member Display the current active member e Standby Member Display the current standby member LACP Information TAG pon rege Pokey ae Set Mer Receiv PrdTx ug rem LAGI GE2 00000000000 DETACH DFLT FstPRD AGF LGE Figure 4 4 13 LACP Information Page Screenshot 110 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trunk Display the current trunk ID e Port Display the current port number e PartnerSysld The system ID of link partner This field would be updated when the port receives LACP PDU from link partner e PnKey Port key of partner This field would be updated when the po
80. 2 22 SNMP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNMP Display the current SNMP status 4 2 7 3 SNMP View Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 View Table Setting screens in Figure 4 2 23 and Figure 4 2 24 appear 70 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series View Table See Add Figure 4 2 23 SNMPv3 View Table Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Subtree OID The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk e Subtree OID Mask The bitmask identifies which positions in the specified object identifier are to be regarded as wildcards for the purpose of pattern matching e View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should exist another view entry in which view type is included and its OID subtree oversteps the excluded view entry Buttons Add C
81. 267 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 12 Storm Control Storm control for the switch is configured on this Page There is an unknown unicast storm rate control unknown multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table 4 9 12 1 Global Setting The Storm Control Global Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 69 amp Figure 4 9 70 appear storm Control Global Setting Opps bps Preamble amp IFG 9Excluded included Apply Figure 4 9 69 Storm Control Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unit Controls the unit of measure for the storm control rate as pps or bps The default value is bps e Preamble amp IFG Set the excluded or included interframe gap Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes Storm Control Global Information NEM CO MN Preamble amp IFG Excluded Figure 4 9 70 Storm Control Global Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unit Display the current unit e Preamble amp IFG Display the current preamble amp IFG 268 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 12 2 Port Setting Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There are three
82. 40 21 Transmitted B Transmitted Overloading Not 1440 Overloading 21 Transmitted B Transmitted Em 1 Transmitte d SS ees B Transmitted 1440 Mot 21 Transmitted B Transmitted Overloading Not 1438 22 Transmitted B Transmitted Overloading B Transmitted 1 Transmitte d 1 Transmitte d B Transmitted B Transmitted 1 Transmitte d 1 Transmitte d B Transmitted Figure 4 12 16 LLDP Port Overloading Table Page Screenshot Object Interface Total Bytes Left to Send Bytes Status Mandatory TLVs MED Capabilities MED Location MED Network Policy MED Extended Power via MDI 802 3 TLVs Description The switch port number of the logical port Total number of bytes of LLDP information that is normally sent in a packet Total number of available bytes that can also send LLDP information in a packet Gives the status of the TL Vs Displays if the mandatory group of TLVs were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the capabilities packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the location packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the network policies packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the extended power via MDI packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the 802 3 TLVs were transmitted or overloaded 311 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series e Optional TLVs If the LLDP MED extended power via MDI p
83. 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Please make sure your connected cables are with the same pin assignment and color as the above table before deploying the cables into your network 349
84. 82 Circuit ID Gettng cc cccccecccccseeeeceeseeeceececceneeeceeseeseeeessegeeecsaueeesaueeessegeeeseaeeeessueeesseneesseges 251 AO DV MANIC ARP WAS EE HEEN 252 e SE IG al SONG EE 252 4992 VEAN Se EE 253 PE POE HUNG E 254 Ut e EE 256 ADO Fate E E 257 BP SOUS e HE 258 EE EE EE 259 4 99 2 Binding RE LEE 261 EE EE 262 Eh BN RE 264 AO EN Global DoS Setting E 264 49 11 2 Re E Port Seting EE 267 PU WZ EOIN ON eegene Eege 268 AoT RO Dall SE MING E 268 SE PACA PON e ME 269 5 UM e Ieee ee een nee ee ee er ee ee eee ee ee ee ee eee ee PN 271 BNO Ree le 272 410 2 elu KE 273 4 10 3 IPv4 based e m 276 A NO A PMA ASCO KEE 277 AN Oso MPV EN EE 282 410 6 MPN AS Ee 283 410 7 ACL Cl ele E 288 4 11 MAC Address Table E 289 AA tet IAG Se CIN EE 290 E MAC STI pio EE 291 4 11 3 Dynamic Address Setting E 292 e PL ANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Ad Nery eMC LG ANIC EE 293 BAZ E 295 412 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol ME 295 i ZIP GIO Al ute NR 296 21293 LLDP Port Seting esinen AAAA Gelso eee operate ssi sacar sat ee NEEE A ATEA eee 298 om ARN LEO A RE e E 301 4 12 0 LLDP Remove DEVICE EE 303 4 126 MED Network ONY 304 4 12 7 MED Port Setting ER D OO T 308 412 8 LLDP Overloading EE 311 E KEE 312 A13 DO PAQMOS
85. ANET i User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Querier State Display the current querier state e Querier Status Display the current querier status e Querier Version Display the current querier version e Querier IP Display the current querier IP 4 7 2 3 IGMP Static Group Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in above sections For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the Managed Switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Static multicast addresses are never aged out When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN The IGMP Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4 7 12 amp Figure 4 7 13 appear Add IGMP Static Group VLAN ID Group IP Address Member Ports Add Figure 4 7 12 Add IGMP Static Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list e Group IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service e Member Ports Select port number from this drop down list
86. B Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET Managed Switch supports both single mode and multi mode SFP transceivers The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Fast Ethernet Transceiver 100BASE X SFP Connector E Fiber Mode Distance Wavelength nm Operating Temp Multi Mode 2km 1310nm 0 60 degrees C Model Ter T Te iddi MFB FX MFB F20 MFB F40 Single Mode 1310nm 0 60 degrees C Single Mode 1310nm 0 60 degrees C Single Mode 120km 1550nm 0 60 degrees C Multi Mode 2km 1310nm 40 75 degrees C Single Mode 1550nm 40 75 degrees C MFB F120 MFB TFX MFB TF20 Fast Ethernet Transceiver 100BASE BX Single Fiber Bi directional SFP 2km i i i 2km eTe 3 EES 01 1510 IU e 0 cens Fiber Mode Distance uc MEA EEN Operating Temp Interface WDM LC MFB TFB40 WDM LC Single Mode 1550nm 1310nm 40 75 degrees C 38 PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Metwarking amp Communication Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver 1000BASE X SFP Model Speed Mbps bon Fiber Mode Distance Wavelength nm Operating Temp MGB GT 1000 Cope 100m 0 e60degreesC MGB SX 0 60 degrees C MGB SX2 2km 0 60 degrees C MGB LX 0 60 degrees C MGB L30 0 60 degrees C MGB L60 0 60 degrees C MGB L70 0 60 degrees C MGB L120 0 60 degrees C MGB TSX 40 75 degrees C MGB TLX 40 75 degrees C MGB TL30 40 75 degrees C M
87. C address for the entry e VLAN The VLAN ID for the entry e Port Display the current port eae Delete Click to delete static MAC status entry 290 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 11 2 MAC Filtering By filtering MAC address the switch can easily filter the per configured MAC address and reduce the un safety The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 11 3 amp Figure 4 11 4 appear Add Figure 4 11 3 MAC Filtering Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN 1 4096 Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Buttons Add Click to add new MAC filtering setting Static MAC Status Figure 4 11 4 Statics MAC Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for entries e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e VLAN The VLAN ID for the entry e Delete Click Delete to delete static MAC status entry 291 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 11 3 Dynamic Address Setting By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds The Dynamic Address Setting Status screens in Figure 4 11 5 amp Figure 4 11 6 appear Dynamic Address Setting Aging Time Range 10 630 Apply Figure 4 11 5 Dynami
88. CIST instance settings The CIST Instance Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 6 8 amp Figure 4 6 9 appear CIST Instance Setting Apply Figure 4 6 8 CIST Instance Setting Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge e Max Hops This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 e Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 153 PLANET Wetworking amp Communication User s Manual
89. D snooping settings E MLD Snooping Statistics Display the MLD snooping statistics B Multicast Throttling Configures multicast throttling setting Setting Multicast Filter Configures multicast filter 4 7 1 Properties This page provides multicast properties related configuration The multicast Properties and Information screen in Figure 4 7 1 amp Figure 4 7 2 appear PropertiesSetting Unknown Multicast Action ODrop Flood Router Port IPv4 Forward Method MAC Src Dst lp IPv6 Forward Method MAC ObsSrc Dst Ip Apply Figure 4 7 1 Properties Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unknown Multicast Unknown multicast traffic method Action Drop flood or send to router port e Pv4 Forward Method Configure the IPv4 multicast forward method e IPv6 Forward Method Configure the IPv6 multicast forward method Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 162 d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Properties Informations Information Name Information Value Forwarding Method For IPv4 Forwarding Method For IPv6 MAC Figure 4 7 2 Properties Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unknown Multicast Display the current unknown multicast action status Action e Forward Method For IPv4 Display the current IPv4 multicast forward method e Forward Method For IPv6 Di
90. Daylight Saving Time Offset Recurring From Recurring To Non recurring From Non recurring To Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series To set time manually Allows to select the time zone according to the current location of switch This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration Select Disable to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration Select Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year Select Non Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time Year Select the starting Year Month Select the starting month Day Select the starting day Hours Select the starting hour Minutes Select the starting minute Seconds Select the starting seconds configuration Default Disabled Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time Range 1 to 1440 Week Select the starting week number Day Select the starting day Month Select the starting month Hours Select the starting hour Minutes Select the starting minute Week Select the starting week number Day Select the starting day Month Select the starting month Hours Select the starting hour Minutes Select the starting minute Week Select the starting week number Day Select the starting day Month Select th
91. Description e Port Display the current port e VLAN Display the current VLAN e Circuit ID Display the current circuit ID 251 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 9 8 Dynamic ARP Inspection Dynamic ARP Inspection DAI is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration A Dynamic ARP prevents the untrusted ARP packets based on the DHCP Snooping Database 4 9 8 1 Global Setting DAI Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 50 amp Figure 4 9 51 appear DAI Setting DAI OEnabled Disabled Figure 4 9 50 DAI Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DAI Enable the Global Dynamic ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection Buttons Apply Click to apply changes DAI Informations Figure 4 9 51 DAI Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DAI Display the current DAI status 252 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET E Networking A Communieation 4 9 8 2 VLAN Setting DAI VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4 9 52 amp Figure 4 9 53 appear DAI VLAN Setting LF BEE E em mg m ZW SONE
92. E 802 1X Port based Autbhentcaton 213 EE Eeer 216 911 3502 1X EE 217 4 9 1 4 Guest VLAN Setting seeesssssesssseseeeeeeen nennen nnne nn nn nnne nn nssna sn ri sa sns ssa sara sais r risa sans nas 219 o RS Ee Ee FOS M 221 42 92 ENEE 222 49 VP dca M 225 DRE Dv V 227 EE e le d T H 228 2942 Ee EE 229 EE 230 FE TENE M E 230 2 959 2 EE 231 SECOS QR e PO A O 233 Eege 234 4 9 6 Management Access Method cisisiccissecsdastcnavandadcnndasscndvardanecndendanadacdansidadennded tuadiiaesdnetabatinadasdbvdastteiinsdanuecdestenetadaaa 235 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication eR M OM iib OG os eas EE E TETTE 235 IS CCS Fr MS Pm 237 PS IDG SMO ODIO ME 238 4 9 7 1 DHCP Snooping Overview ccccceccccsescccceseeccceseeeceececseececsucessaecessegeeessaueeessuecessegeeessseessegeeessenseeseges 238 49 T2 CNA MN re ec cae ek pei mmc 239 4 9 7 3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Geng 240 FE OG Se IN e EE 242 EE 244 BDO AlAs FAS MN NE M 245 OT ol CIAR MPH 247 49 7 9 Opliong2 Slopak Seling PERIERE Tm 248 49 79 Optone en S CUI e WE 249 4 9 7 10 Option
93. Enabled prem T Internet IP Address IP Address 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 x Figure 3 1 5 SNMP Management 3 6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility For easily listing the Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment the Planet Smart Discovery Utility from user s manual CD ROM is an ideal solution The following installation instructions are to guide you to running the Planet Smart Discovery Utility 1 Deposit the Planet Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC 2 Run this utility as the following screen appears select Adapter 169 254 852 237 50 26 90 44 3E D6 Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Mult Update All y Figure 3 1 6 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen 44 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC choose a different LAN card by using the Select Adapter tool File Option Help 3 x Exit JMACAdsiess Device Name vesion _ DevioelP__ NewPareword P Ades DD 30 4F 28 04 01 Bs aziD ePzT25 1 0b140417 192 169 0 100 182 158 0 100 255 255 255 0 192 169 0 254 Default Location select Adapter 169 254 962 237 50 26 90 44 3E D6 Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Multi Update All Figure 3 1 7 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen 1 This utility shows all the necessary information from the devices such as MAC Address Device
94. Figure 4 7 35 IGMP Port Max Groups Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Max Groups Display the current Max groups e Action Display the current action 4 7 7 Multicast Filter In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service is based on a specific subscription plan The multicast filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port Multicast filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port A multicast filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled multicast join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the multicast join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the multicast join report is dropped When you have created a Multicast profile number you can then configure the multicast groups to filter and set the access mode Command Usage e Each profile has only one access mode either permit or deny e When the access mode is set to permit multicast join reports are processed when a multicast gro
95. GB TL70 40 75 degrees C Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver 1000BASE BX Single Fiber Bi directional SFP Model Speed Mbps Connector Fiber Mode SE Wavelength Wavelength Interface TX RX MGB LA10 0 60 degrees C MGB LB10 0 60 degrees C MGB LA20 0 60 degrees C MGB LB20 0 60 degrees C MGB LA40 0 60 degrees C MGB LB40 0 60 degrees C MGB LAGO 0 60 degrees C MGB LB60 0 60 degrees C MGB TLA10 40 75 degrees C MGB TLB10 40 75 degrees C MGB TLA2O 40 75 degrees C MGB TLB20 40 75 degrees C MGB TLA4O 40 75 degrees C MGB TLB40 40 75 degrees C MGB TLAGO 40 75 degrees C MGB TLB6O 40 75 degrees C Operating Temp It is recommended to use PLANET SFP on the Managed Switch If you insert an SFP transceiver that is not supported the Managed Switch will not recognize it In the installation steps below this Manual uses Gigabit SFP transceiver as an example However the steps for Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver are similar 39 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 1 e JI Networking amp Communication Before we connect Managed Switch to the other network device we have to make sure both sides of the SFP transceivers are with the same media type for example 1000BASE SX to 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX to 1000BASE LX Check whether the fiber optic cable type matches with the SFP transceiver requirement gt Toconnect to 1000BASE SX SFP transceiver please use the multi mode
96. GE 180 2E uBBE aT n E 182 4 7 4 6 MLD Forward 183 Be Teo MLD Snooping BEE 184 zar 6 Multi ast Throttling Setting EE 186 Aeta MUNCA E EE 187 4 7 7 1 Multicast Profile Setting 00nnn00nnnaannnnnnnnnennnnnnnnsennnsrrnnsrrnnsrrrrsrrersrrersrrersnrrrsnrrrsnrrrsnrrrsnrrrsnrrrsnrrrsnrersnrrnne 188 PLANET P User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 7 12 IGMP Filter Setting RE Emm 189 A Teh MLD Filer ne EE 190 42 8 QUAY Of EE 192 ABV CIN STS ANGINA ee EE 192 a AE E ares teh cera ta cine et eed hese eee ete etna ete ded ae ne de ne ale net ae Gee cake rege Aaa ett ta E eee 193 B02 T QOS PIODSITIBS ee 193 BG 22 OOS FOP Be MNO EE 194 2 obs SUC UGS SeN Sere usher u 195 4 8 2 4 Ee 2 8 o EE 196 EM ho Ce al Dn e EE 198 4 8 2 6 IP Precedence Mapping EE 199 BG 9090 ee EE 201 ite Woy Oe Glopal SeNingS ONERE m mE 201 PO UI EE 202 AO Aa E EE 203 4 8 4 1 Ingress Bandwidth Control 203 4 8 4 2 Egress Bandwidth Control 204 4 9 4 3 Egress EE 205 29 5 ECEN EAN RE 206 49 0 1 MMOGUCTION 10 VOICE VLAN E 206 Ae een 207 4 8 5 3 Telephony OUI MAC Gettnmg nnne nnne nennen nnne nnne nhan nn sna inanes insanis sns na rans ans 208 4 8 5 4 Telephony OUI Port Setting A 210 BG Se CUEIU E 212 iE Re TM CH 212 4 9 1 1 Understanding IEE
97. GS Managed Series Metworking amp Communication Multicast Receiver Switch Multicast Transmitter A IPTV Server Router Switch Switch e i Switch Multicast ES Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 7 3 Multicast Service B E Multicast E Receiver Multicast ees E the streg tch Transmitter Switc A IPTV Server Router C Multicast ES Receiver Multicast Receiver c d D Figure 4 7 4 Multicast Flooding 164 7 B e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Multicast Receiver p IGMP Snooping Multicast p Switch Transmitter A IPTV Server IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping i C Switch Switch IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver CH Multicast Receiver EE D Figure 4 7 5 IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Type Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below mn Wem Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group A
98. GS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Object Description e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry e Port The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Add to Static MAC table Click to add dynamic MAC address to static MAC address 294 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 12 LLDP 4 12 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and ma
99. Idle Member Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Figure 4 7 6 IGMP State Transitions 166 r PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication a IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note 4 7 2 1 IGMP Setting This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 7 7 Figure 4 7 8 amp Figure 4 7 9 appear ISMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Status Enable ODisable IGMP Snooping Version v2 Ova ISMP Snooping Report Suppression Enable ODisable Apply Figure 4 7 7 IGMP Snooping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IGMP Snooping Status Enable or disable the IGMP snooping The d
100. Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times 296 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Reinitialization Delay e Transmit Delay e LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Buttons Apply Click to apply changes LLDP Global Config User s Manual of WGS Managed Series TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Transmit Delay seconds Transmit Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Transmission Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval Configures the amount of LLDP MED Fast Start LLDPDUS to transmit during the activation process of the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism Range 1 10 packets Default 3 packets The MED Fast Start Count parameter is part of the timer which ensures that the
101. L entry 281 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 8 PLANET Wetworking amp Communication 4 10 5 IPv6 based ACL This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations IPv6 based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 9 amp Figure 4 10 10 appear IPv6 Based ACL ACL Name Add Figure 4 10 9 IPv6 based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ACL Name Create a named IPv6 based ACL list Buttons Add l l Click to add ACL name list ACL Table Figure 4 10 10 ACL Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Click Delete to delete ACL name entry 282 PLANET Watwarking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 10 6 IPv6 based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The IPv6 based ACE screens in Figure 4 10 11 amp Figure 4 10 12 appear IPv6 Based ACE sd Range 1 2147483647 1 is first processed 9 Permit Deny Shutdown Any IP Select from list he ze Any Q user Defined ECG Any Q user Defined D Us for matching 1s far na matching DAD single o jJ Range 0 65535
102. LAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch E Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 117 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 5 3 Management VLAN Configure Management VLAN on this page The screens in Figure 4 5 1 amp Figure 4 5 2 appear Management VLAN Setting Management VLAN detault 4 Apply Figure 4 5 1 Management VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Management VLAN Provide the managed VLAN ID Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Management VLAN State Config Name Config Value Figure 4 5 2 Management VLAN State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Management VLAN Display the current management VLAN 118 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 5 4 Create VLAN Create delete VLAN on this page The screens in Figure 4 5 3
103. N information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network GVRP enabled Switches VLAN Table im Switch A Switch B GVRP Enable GVRP Enable switch A New VLAN ID Manually Added VLAN Table a 4 VLAN Table VLAN 1 VLAN 20 GVRP Joins packet Switch A VID 20 GVRP Enable GVRP Enable New VLAN Manually Added VID 20 Switch B Learning Dynamic VLAN from Switch A LAN Table ee zf cn VLAN Table VLAN 20 Switch A GVRP Enable GVRP Enable VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch The GVRP Global Setting Information screens in Figure 4 5 13 amp Figure 4 5 14 appear GVRP Global Setting GVRP Disable Enable LeaveAll Timeout 65 32765 centiseconds Apply Figure 4 5 13 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot 129 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e GVRP e Join Timeout e Leave Timeout e LeaveAll Timeout User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Controls whether GVRP is enabled or disabled on this switch The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate in a VLAN group Range 20 16375 centiseconds Default 20 centiseconds The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time sho
104. NET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 5 7 Pot VLAN Membership E 125 4 5 8 Protocol VLAN Group Setting EE 126 T3 Protocol VLAN POI SC dl EE 128 D SM LONE RSS d EE 129 4 5 11 GVRP Port Seting E oo mm 131 A DAZ RP VLAN oerna a E A E E EEE E EE E E 132 e OV RP AGS EE 133 4 5 14 VLAN setting CX e 135 4 5 14 1 Two separate 802 1Q VLANS nenne nnnnn nemen nnnnnnnsna nn esa irse is ssea sss sa asina sss essa ann 135 4 5 14 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switches nemen 138 46 Spanning ree Proloco R 141 KON NEE 141 46 2 SITP Glopal ne E 148 POs ene OUI E 150 46 4 Clo FHS ane Se GING EE 153 EE ON UE eege 155 4 6 6 MST Instance Configuration cccccccccccsesccccescecceeececseuececeuseeeseseecsueeecsueeeeseuecessegseessaeceesageeesseseeessgesesseneeeses 157 AE MST POr es UN EE 159 Aoo Ue EE 161 BT ITU Te EE 162 a RN M Gielen coe ee ee ee ae Oe ne eee ene eee eee ne eae ee 162 a 2 GIN SIMO COMA E 163 E E Se UNG EE 167 AT 22 IGMP Querier Setting WE 169 4 7 2 3 IGMP Static ab E 170 4 1 2 4 IGMP Group Table EE 171 e ENEE ROUET e EE 172 a SALRSNIEiisU di ler TT 173 2 ae a AC ager cB 174 zaras e elen ee e 175 At AMED SOO Oi BEE 177 i Ge E Bess EE 177 OE OT BR ro em go o 179 NE RR NSSCIEL u Men PET 180 4L 44 Ee cieli n e
105. Name firmware version and Device IP Subnet address It can also assign new password IP Subnet address and description to the devices 2 After setup is completed press the Update Device Update Multi or Update All button to take effect The meaning of the 3 buttons above are shown below W Update Device use current setting on one single device W Update Multi use current setting on multi devices E Update All use current setting on whole devices in the list The same functions mentioned above also can be found in Option tools bar 3 To click the Control Packet Force Broadcast function it allows you to assign a new setting value to the Web Smart Switch under a different IP subnet address 4 Press the Connect to Device button and the Web login screen appears in Figure 3 1 4 5 Press the Exit button to shut down the Planet Smart Discovery Utility 45 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web based management About Web based Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web based Management supports Internet Explorer 8 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enha
106. OO000 o OOOOOOOOO oo0000000000 OOoOOOOOOO oo000000000000 Reset Dimensions unit mm 33 PLANET Networking amp Communication WGS 4215 8T2S User s Manual of WGS Managed Series u Dimensions W x D x H 178 x 25 x 134mm OOOOOOQ Od 05 E OO o OO oO OOOOOOOOO OO O O00000 178 00 163 00 Input DC 12 48 AC 24 DC Input R yd i P L O1 PLANET 7U 100 Ujk SC Networking amp Communication industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch p 00 eut x 5CT 4 10100 elle CT 4 5 bk 6 7 8 34 Dimensions unit mm e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 2 2 Installing the Switch This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps 2 2 1 Wall Mount Magnet Installation A To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf please follow these steps Step 1 There are 4 holes with 8mm diameter on the wall IN WGS 804HPT WGS 4215 8T the distance between the 2 holes is 133mm Mi WGS 4215 8T2S the distance between the 2 holes is 163mm Note The line through them must be horizontal Step 2 Install a conductor pipe inside the board hole and flush the edge of the conductor pipe wi
107. Oe Tun e ie E 74 SANE ONIN EE 75 4 2 7 7 SNMPVv1 2 Notification Recipients sssssessssssssssseennnennnn menm nnnm nnne nnn nnn ne nnne nnne nsns TT 4 2 7 8 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients cc ccccecccceecceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseeceseeeeeseeeeseeessucessueeeseeeesseesseeesneeesaes 78 4 2 19 SNMP Engine ID eee eee ea Oe nee ee eee ee 79 42 710 SNMP Remote Engine D EE 80 43 PON IWAN AGC TE E 82 o E T POTC Ong AON see sce vet e a a 82 e BR ein Ree 84 4 3 3 Bandwidth ME Ee WEE 89 BAe Ol gll ee RR TOT T mm 90 A D nee e EE 92 4 3 6 Port Error Disabled Configuration ccccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cesses eeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesseeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeas 93 TON FIOM ioo cc X 95 EE VOLSCICO PONG sss M 95 A O EE E 98 4 3 10 SFP Moduls informato BE 99 4 3 10 1 SFP Module E 99 4 3 10 1 SFP lee ETC 101 44 LAK AAG Ol CO EU Le EE 102 E End e O E E E E E E E EEE A I E E E A A O A E EE OEA 104 qb LAG Ee Lee EE 105 AA AG ele Ea S E E E T 106 A NAE EPCS RE 108 LAS ACF PONM ONO eee ne ne ee er eee eee ee ee eee ene eee m 109 oN EE 110 BD IAIN E 113 E E Re 113 4 5 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 114 4 5 3 Ma apagement VLAN EE 118 AO Chale n BEE 119 e o nterace SeNngS seriei a a ai a aeai 120 4 5 6 Port 0 ek EE 124 e DL A
108. PPY Click to apply changes LLDP MED Network Policy Table Delete E Network Policy Number Application VLAN ID VLAN Tag L2 Priority DSCP Value Figure 4 12 11 LLDP MED Network Policy Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Network Policy Display the current network policy number Number e Application Display the current application e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e VLAN Tag Display the current VLAN tag status e L2 Priority Display the current L2 priority e DSCP Value Display the current DSCP value Buttons Delete Click to delete LLDP MED network policy table entry 307 Networking amp Communication 4 12 7 MED Port Setting User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The Port LLDP MED Configuration Port Setting Table screens in Figure 4 12 12 amp Figure 4 12 13 appear Port LLDP MED Configuration Port Select MED Enable MED Optional TLVs MED Network Policy Select Optional TLVs Select Optional TLVs Apply The page includes the following fields Figure 4 12 12 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot Object e Port Select e MED Enable e MED Optional TVLs e MED Network Policy Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Description Select port from this drop down list Enable or disable MED configuration Configures the information included in the MED TLV field of advertised messages Network Policy This option advert
109. Range Range 0 65535 ANY Single Range 0 65535 b Range 0 65535 Range Range 0 65535 ess Range 0 65535 Don t care Don t Care Don t Care Don t Care Don t Care Don t Care Any ODSCP to match o Range O 63 OIP Precedence to match Range 0 7 SANY Select from list destination Protocol ID to match Range 0 255 ANY User Defined NI Range 0 255 Figure 4 10 11 IP based ACE Page Screenshot 283 The page includes the following fields Networking amp Communication Object ACL Name Sequence Action Protocol Source IP Address Source IP Address Value Source IP Prefix Length Destination IP Address Destination IP Address Value Destination IP Prefix Length Source Port User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Select ACL name from this drop down list Set the ACL sequence Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE B Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned B Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped B Shutdown Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE Specify the protocol filter for this ACE B Any IP No protocol filter is specified B Select from list If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and select protocol from this drop down list Specify the Source IP address
110. Refresh Chaddr Check Dropped Untrust Port Dropped Untrust Port With Option Dropped Invalid Dropped Figure 4 9 39 DHCP Snooping Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Forwarded Display the current forwarded e Chaddr Check Dropped Display the chaddr check dropped e Untrusted Port Dropped Display untrusted port dropped e Untrusted Port with Display untrusted port with option82 dropped Option82 Dropped e Invalid Dropped Display invalid dropped Buttons Clear Click to clear the statistics Refresh l D Click to refresh the statistics 244 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 7 6 Database Agent Overview of the DHCP Snooping Database Agent When DHCP snooping is enabled the switch uses the DHCP snooping binding database to store information about untrusted interfaces The database can have up to 8192 bindings Each database entry binding has an IP address an associated MAC address the lease time in hexadecimal format the interface to which the binding applies and the VLAN to which the interface belongs A checksum value the end of each entry is the number of bytes from the start of the file to end of the entry Each entry is 72 bytes followed by a space and then the checksum value To keep the bindings when the switch reloads you must use the DHCP
111. Select Ports 9Disable Enable 9 Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 8 2 QoS Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e CoS Value Select CoS value from this drop down list e Remark CoS Disable or enable remark CoS e Remark DSCP Disable or enable remark DSCP Remark IP Precedence Disable or enable remark IP Precedence Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes QoS Port Status Port o CoS value Remark CoS Remark DSCP Remark IP Precedence D NEEN isle gcliles RU tse eed Eei lo ise rage tesis disabled dis abled disabled LAGA disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled fc EE gras Jedien Figure 4 8 3 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot 194 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Port CoS Value Remark CoS Remark DSCP Remark IP Precedence 4 8 2 3 Queue Settings User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current CoS value Display the current remark CoS Display the current remark DSCP Display the current remark IP precedence The Queue Table and Information screens in Figure 4 8 4 amp Figure 4 8 5 appear The page includes the following fields Queue Table Queue Apply Object Queue Strict Priority WRR Weight of WRR Bandwid
112. Severity Facility Apply Figure 4 2 16 Remote Log Target Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Provide the remote syslog IP address of this switch e Server Port Provide the port number of remote syslog server Default Port no 514 e Severity The severity of the local log entry The following severity types are supported B emerg Emergency level of the system unstable for local log B alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log B crit Critical level of the critical conditions for local log B error Error level of the error conditions for local log B warning Warning level of the warning conditions for local log B notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log W info Informational level of the informational messages for local log WB debug Debug level of the debugging messages for local log e Facility Local0 7 local user 0 7 Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes Remote Logging Setting Status Figure 4 2 17 Remote Log Setting Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Status Display the current remote syslog state e PLANET i l User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication e Server Info Display the current remote syslog server information e Severity Display the current remote syslog severity e Facility Display the current remote
113. TTP Information Information Name Information Value HTTP Service Enabled User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Login Authentication List default Figure 4 9 26 HTTP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTP Service Display the current HTTP service e Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list e Session Timeout Display the current session timeout 4 9 5 4 HTTPs The HTTPs Settings and Information screen in Figure 4 9 27 amp Figure 4 9 28 appear HTTPS Settings QOEnahbled Disabled ogin Authentication List default sion Timeout 0 866400 minutes Figure 4 9 27 HT TPs Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTPs Service Disable or enable HT TPs service e Login Authentication List Select login authentication list from this drop down list e Session Timeout Set the session timeout value Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 234 PLANET E User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication HTTPS Information Information Name HTTPS Service Information Value Disabled Login Authentication List default Session Timeout 0 Figure 4 9 28 HTTPs Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTPs Service Display the current HTTPs service e Login Authentication List Display the cur
114. The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 9 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server Authentication Client l Epi pra 802 1X Switch EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request a EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge 4 EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request SSS EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept C Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 9 2 EAP Message Exchange a Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not run
115. VI AM LISI Status QEnabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 9 52 DAI VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Status Enables Dynamic ARP Inspection on the specified VLAN Options B Enable B Disable Buttons Apply Click to apply changes DAI VL AM Setting Figure 4 9 53 DAI VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANList Display the current VLAN list e Status Display the current status 253 e PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 9 8 3 Port Setting User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Configures switch ports as DAI trusted or untrusted and check mode DAI Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 54 amp Figure 4 9 55 appear DAI Port Setting Type Src Mac Chk Dst Mac Chk IP Chk IP Allow Zero Port un Trusted O Trusted 9 Disabled QEnabled Disabled Enabled 9 Disabled CEnabled 9 Disabled Enabled Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Type e Src Mac Chk e Dst Mac Chk e IP Chk e IP Allow Zero Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes Figure 4 9 54 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot Description Select port from this drop down list Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on t
116. VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging B VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame B Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different V
117. WGS Managed Series B User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DA MAC value appears When User Defined is selected for the DA MAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DA MAC value Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings B Oo ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the DA MAC address B 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the DA MAC address Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE B Any No SAMAC filter is specified B User Defined If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a SA MAC value appears When User Defined is selected for the SA MAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SA MAC value Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings B Oo ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SA MAC address B 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SA MAC address Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Include or exclude the 802 1p value Set the 802 1p value B 0 where frame is not equal to the 802 1p value B 1 where frame is equal to the 802 1p value You c
118. ackets were sent or if they were overloaded e MED Inventory Displays if the mandatory group of TLVs was transmitted or overloaded e 802 1 TLVs Displays if the 802 1 TLVs were transmitted or overloaded 4 12 9 LLDP Statistics Use the LLDP Device Statistics screen to general statistics for LLDP capable devices attached to the switch and for LLDP protocol messages transmitted or received on all local interfaces The LLDP Global and Port Statistics screens in Figure 4 12 17 amp Figure 4 12 18 appear LLDP Global Statistics Clear Refresh Be ER Aw B Figure 4 12 17 LLDP Global Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Insertions Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot e Deletions Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot e Drops Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full e Age Outs Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Buttons Clear l o Click to clear the statistics Refresh Click to refresh the statistics 312 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series LLDP Port Statistics Figure 4 12 18 LLDP Port Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e TX Frame Total The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port
119. ackup Upgrade Figure 4 16 4 Upgrade Manager Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Upgrade Method Select upgrade method from this drop down list e Server IP Fill in your TF TP server IP address e File Name The name of firmware image or configuration e Upgrade Type Select upgrade type e Image Select active or backup image Buttons Upgrade Click to upgrade image or configuration 341 PLANET Eeri User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 16 5 Dual Image This page provides information about the active and backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the backup image The web page displays two tables with information about the active and backup firmware images The Dual Image Configuration and Information screens in Figure 4 16 5 amp Figure 4 16 6 appear Dual Image Configuration v1 0b140225 bix Active v1 0b140225 bix Backup Apply Figure 4 15 5 Dual Image Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Active Image Select the active or backup image Buttons Apply Click to apply active image Images Information v1 0b140225 bix HERES We SSS Fem oL Image Name v1 0b140225 bix Image Size 5712633 Bytes Created Time 2014 02 26 19 42 58 UTC Figure 4 16 6 Dual Image Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fi
120. ames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 88 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 3 3 Bandwidth Utilization The Bandwidth Utilization page displa
121. amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Index Display the current index e IP Type Display the current IP Type e Group from Display the current group from e Group to Display the current group to e Action Display the current action e Modify R Edit Click to edit parameter Click Pelete to delete the MLD IGMP profile entry 4 7 7 2 IGMP Filter Setting The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 7 38 amp Figure 4 7 39 appear Filter Setting Port Select Filter Profile ID Select Ports d Apply Figure 4 7 38 Filter Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Filter Profile ID Select filter profile ID from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 189 e PLANET E w User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Port Filter Status Pot Filter Profile ID Figure 4 7 39 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e Filter Profile ID Display the current filter profile ID e Action Click Show to display detail profile parameter Click Delete to delete the IGMP filter profile entry 4 7 7 3 MLD Filter Setting The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 7 40 amp Figure 4 7 41 appear Filter Setting Port Select Filter Prof
122. amp Figure 4 4 5 appear LAG Management Name orts Apply Figure 4 4 4 LAG Management Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG Select LAG number from this drop down list e Name Indicates each LAG name e Type Indicates the trunk type Static Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them e Ports Select port number from this drop down list to establish Link Aggregation LAG Management Information Type Link State 5tate Active Member Member Active Member Standby Member Om me a Ca a E um are f fe ws CC ESCHER RRE ws fer fd we CC ver dere fd C oo p e GOO Figure 4 4 5 LAG Management Information Page Screenshot 105 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG The LAG for the settings contained in the same row e Name Display the current name e Type Display the current type e Link State Display the link state e Active Member Display the active member e Standby Member Display the standby member e Modify Click Edit to modify LAG configuration PoE Ports of WGS 804HPT will not be a LAG group 4 4 3 LAG Port Setting This page allows setting configuration fo
123. an enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x05DD to OxFFFF A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value MAC Based ACE Table Destination Source VLAN ID 802 1p 802 1p Mask MAC Address En Mask MAC Address Wildcard Mask Figure 4 10 4 MAC based ACE Table Page Screenshot 2 4 e PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e ACL Name e Sequence e Action e Destination MAC Address e Destination MAC Address Mask e Source MAC Address e Source MAC Address Mask e VLAN ID e 802 1p e 802 1p Mask e EtherType e Modify User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the current destination MAC address Display the current destination MAC address mask Display the current source MAC address Display the current source MAC address mask Display the current VLAN ID Display the current 802 1p value Display the current 802 1p mask Display the current Ethernet type E dit Click to edit MAC based ACL parameter Click Delete to delete MAC based ACL entry 275 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 10 3 IPv4 based ACL This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware du
124. an send multiple requests without receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group An SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public 69 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 2 7 2 SNMP System Information Configure SNMP setting on this page The SNMP System global setting screens in Figure 4 2 21 amp Figure 4 2 22 appear SNMP Global Setting 9 Disabled Enabled Apply Figure 4 2 21 SNMP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Status Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes SNMP Informations Information Name Information Value Disabled Figure 4
125. ange A LNK ACI 48V 56V III Data 5 6 7 4 8 gt Figure 2 1 1a WGS 804HPT Front Panel 25 PLANET Networking amp Communication GS 4215 8T Front Panel GS 4215 8T2S Front Panel Input DC 12V 48V DC Input Range 12V 48V User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 3 lt 4 gt p 1000 eLNK ACI 4 10 100 LNK ACT Q PLANET Networking amp Communication Industrial 8 Port Gigabit Managed Switch Input Range 1000 LNK DC 12V 48V 10 100 AT AC 24V Figure 2 1 1b WGS 4215 8T Front Panel tet SFP L_ 10 1000 LNK e e PLANET Wa Networking amp Communication Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch p 1000 e LNK ACI BIUIUEMS INTE ACT Figure 2 1 1c WGS 4215 8T2S Front Panel 26 ACT ACT e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication B Gigabit TP Interface 10 100 1000BASE T Copper RJ45 Twisted pair Up to 100 meters HM 100 1000BASE X SFP Slots WGS 4215 8T2S only Each of the SFP Small Form factor Pluggable slots supports dual speed 1000BASE SX LX or 100BASE FX For 1000BASE SX LX SFP transceiver module From 550 meters multi mode fiber to 10 30 50 70 120 kilometers single mode fiber For 100BASE FX SFP transceiver module From 2 kilometers multi mode fiber to 20 40 60 kilometers single mode fiber B AC DC Power Receptacle The Managed Switch fe
126. antages Web Browser e Ideal for configuring the switch remotely e Security can be compromised hackers need e Compatible with all popular browsers to only know the IP address and subnet mask e Can be accessed from any location e May encounter lag times on poor connections e Most visually appealing SNMP Agent e Communicates with switch functions at e Requires SNMP manager software the MIB level e east visually appealing of all three methods e Based on open standards e Some settings require calculations e Security can be compromised hackers need to only know the community name Table 3 1 Comparison of Management Methods 42 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 3 3 Web Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the switch you can access the Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch PC Workstation with Web Browser 192 168 0 x Managed Switch wm ec em dE RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 3 1 3 Web Management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location Web Management requires either Microsoft Inte
127. as a 16Gbps fat pipe and supports fail over as well Also the Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is the Layer 2 protocol included to help discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain A L2 LA L2 L4 Managed Switch Managed Switch Efficient Traffic Control The WGS managed series is loaded with robust QoS features and powerful traffic management to enhance services to business class data voice and video solutions The functionality includes broadcast multicast storm control per port bandwidth control IP DSCP QoS priority and remarking It guarantees the best performance for VoIP and video stream transmission and empowers the enterprises to take full advantage of the limited network resources Powerful Security PLANET WGS managed series offers comprehensive IPv4 IPv6 Layer 2 to Layer 4 Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge It can be used to restrict network access by denying packets based on source and destination IP address TCP UDP ports or defined typical network applications Its protection mechanism also comprises 802 1X port based user and device authentication which can be deployed with RADIUS to ensure the port level security and block illegal users With the Protected Port function communication between edge ports can be prevented to guarantee user privacy Furthermore Port Security function allows to limit the number of network devices on a given port
128. ased strict priority and WRR IEEE 802 1X Port based authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with RADIUS server RADIUS TACACS user access authentication IP MAC port binding MAC filter Static MAC address DHCP Snooping and DHCP Option82 STP BPDU guard BPDU filtering and BPDU forwarding DoS attack prevention Security ARP inspection IP source guard Management Functions Web browser Telnet SNMP v1 v2c Firmware upgrade by HTTP TFTP protocol through Ethernet network Remote Local Syslog Basic Management Interfaces System log LLDP protocol SNTP 23 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Wetwarking amp Communication Secure Management Interfaces SSH SSL SNMP v3 RFC 1213 MIB II RFC 1215 Generic Traps RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Bridge MIB Extensions SNMP MIB S REC 2737 Entity MIB Version 2 RFC 2819 RMON 1 2 3 9 RFC 2863 Interface Group MIB RFC 3635 Ethernet like MIB Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 802 3 10BASE T IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX 100BASE FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x flow control and back pressure IEEE 802 3ad port trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of Service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagging IEEE 802 1x Port
129. ation 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power B Why the PoE Ethernet Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution Check the LNK ACT LED on the PoE Ethernet Switch Try another port on the PoE Ethernet Switch Make sure the cable is installed properly and make sure the cable is the right type Turn off the power After a while turn on power again Nl When connect my PoE device to PoE Ethernet Switch it cannot be powered on Solution 1 Please check the cable type of the connection from the PoE Ethernet Switch port 1 to port 8 to the other end The cable should be an 8 wire UTP Category 5 or above EIA568 cable within 100 meters A cable with only 4 wire short loop or over 100 meters will affect the power supply 2 Please check and assure the device is fully complied with IEEE 802 3af 802 3at standard 347 PLANET Networking amp Communication APPENDIX A Switch s RJ45 Pin Assignments A 1 1000Mbps 1000BASE T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 1 BI D i BI DB 2 BI DA BI DB 3 BI DB BI DA 4 BI DC BI DA 5 BI DC BI DD 6 BI DB BI DA 7 BI DD BI DC 8 BI DD BI DC Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100BASE TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a brid
130. atures a strong dual power input system Terminal block and DC jack incorporated into customer s automation network to enhance system reliability and uptime Power Input Range 3 pin Terminal Block DC Jack Model WGS 804HPT 48 56V DC 48 56V DC 12 48V DC 12 48V DC 24V AC 24V AC WGS 4215 8T 12 48V DC WGS 4215 8T2S 12 48V DC 24V AC To install the 3 pin Terminal Block Connector on the Wall mount Managed Switch follow the following steps Step 1 Insert positive DC power wire into V negative DC power wire into V and grounding wire into Ground Ground V V Step 2 Tighten the wire clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosening In some areas installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Managed Switch Power Notice from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Managed Switch B Reset Button On the left of the front panel the reset button is designed to reboot the Managed Switch without turning off and on the power The following is the summary table of Reset button functions 2f e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Reset Button Pressed and Released Function lt 5 sec System Reboot Reboot the Managed Switch Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings shown below 5 sec Factory Default Default username admin De
131. authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Security 802 1X Access Control 802 1X Setting page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below The 802 1X Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 3 amp Figure 4 9 4 appear 802 1x Setting 9 Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 9 3 802 1X Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e 802 1X Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes 802 1x Informations 802 1X Disabled Figure 4 9 4 802 1X Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e 802 1X Display the current 802 1X state 216 PLANET s User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 1 3 802 1X Port Setting This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X Port Setting The 802 1X Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 5 amp Figure 4 9 6 appear 802 1x Port Setting Select Ports hentication Enable 9 Disable Enable thentication Period 360 Range 30 55535 Default 3600 amp Range 0 65535 Default 60 suppl
132. bidden O Excluded Tagged O Untagged C Ter O umes Se bes o ream O enced reg Dier cee a 9 Ferien eroded O Teed OUnowed i Ses Orrin ORossrS R VLAN ID 3 Port 4 amp 5 Untagged Port 6 amp 7 Tagged Port 1 3 Excluded sz Port to VLAN Settings VLAN ID 3 v Hybrid O Forbidden 9 Excluded O Tagged O Untagged 8 Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged Hybrid Forbidden Excluded O Tagged Untagged v Ce Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged Untagged Hybrid S Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged gement GE Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged L Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged B 140 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 6 Spanning Tree Protocol 4 6 1 Theory The Spanning Tree Protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions E STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w B MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Pr
133. ble Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Click Delete to delete ACL name entry 2 2 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 10 2 MAC based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The MAC based ACE screen in Figure 4 10 3 amp Figure 4 10 4 appears MAC Based ACE Range 1 21474863647 1 is first processed Permit O Deny Shutdown Any O User Defined Os for matching 15 for no matching Any OUser Defined Range 0x0800 0xF FFF Add Figure 4 10 3 MAC based ACE Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ACL Name Select ACL name from this drop down list e Sequence Set the ACL sequence e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE B Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned B Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped B Shutdown Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE e DAMAC Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE B Any No DAMAC filter is specified 2 3 Buttons Add PLANET Networking amp Communication DA MAC Value DA MAC Mask SA MAC SA MAC Value SA MAC Mask VLAN ID 802 1p 802 1p Value 802 1p Mask EtherType Range 0x05DD OxFFFF Click to add ACE list User s Manual of
134. ble reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent The number of inbound packets which is chosen to be discarded even though no errors have been detected to prevent from being delivered to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer is addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer 85 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Received Broadcast Packets Transmit Multicast Packets Transmit Broadcast Packets User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted and is addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted and addres
135. c Addresses Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 630 seconds Default 300 seconds Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes Dynamic Address Status Figure 4 11 6 Dynamic Addresses Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aging Time Display the current aging time 292 i PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 11 4 Dynamic Learned Dynamic MAC Table Dynamic Learned MAC Table is shown on this page The MAC Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address The Dynamic Learned screens in Figure 4 11 6 amp Figure 4 11 7 appear Part GET d IVLAN MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 View Clear Figure 4 11 6 Dynamic Learned Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e VLAN Select VLAN from this drop down list e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface Buttons View Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries MAC Address Information 10 61 55 0418 68 ee ee c M Add to Static MAC table Total Entries 1 Figure 4 11 7 MAC Address Information Page Screenshot 293 User s Manual of W
136. can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value 286 Buttons Add e PLANET Networking amp Communication Click to add ACE list v IPv6 Based ACE Table User s Manual of WGS Managed Series d Name Destination IP Source IP Address IP Address Source Destination Port Range Flag IP ICMP ICMP E Baan m The page includes the following fields Port Wildcard IP Wildcard Range TR Mask Address Mask Figure 4 10 12 IPv6 based ACE Table Page Screenshot Object ACL Name Sequence Action Protocol Source IP Address Source IP Address Wildcard Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Address Wildcard Mask Source Port Range Destination Port Range Flag Set DSCP IP Precedence ICMP Type ICMP Code Modify Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the current protocol Display the current source IP address Display the current source IP address wildcard mask Display the current destination IP address Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask Display the current source port range Display the current destination port range Display the current flag set Display the current DSCP Display the current IP precedence Display the current ICMP Type Display the current ICMP code
137. ce If the action is set to deny any new multicast join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group Once you have configured multicast profiles you can assign them to interfaces on the Managed Switch Also you can set the multicast throttling number to limit the number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time The MAX Group and Information screens in Figure 4 7 34 amp Figure 4 7 35 appear The page includes the following fields Max HIT and Action Setting PortSelect Select Max Groups Action Apply Figure 4 7 34 Max Groups and Action Setting Page Screenshot Object e IP Type e Port Select e Max Groups e Action Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Description Select IPv4 or IPv6 from this drop down list Select port number from this drop down list Sets the maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time Range 0 256 Default 256 Sets the action to take when the maximum number of multicast groups for the interface has been exceeded Default Deny Deny The new multicast group join report is dropped Replace The new multicast group replaces an existing group 186 a PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication IGMP Port Max Groups Information Poe iow LAGE Derry
138. ck the Reopen button B Discard If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port it will trigger the action that do not learn the new MAC and drop the package Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes Port Security Status LAGE KREIEN 8192 LAG Shelled 5192 LAGS wai 5192 Figure 4 9 65 Port Security Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Name The switch port number of the logical port e Enable State Display the current per port security status e L2 Entry Num Display the current L2 entry number e Action Display the current action 263 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 9 11 DoS The DoS is short for Denial of Service which is a simple but effective destructive attack on the internet The server under DoS attack will drop normal user data packet due to non stop processing the attacker s data packet leading to the denial of the service and worse can lead to leak of sensitive data of the server Security feature refers to applications such as protocol check which is for protecting the server from attacks such as DoS The protocol check allows the user to drop matched packets based on specified conditions The security features provide several simple and effective protections against Dos attacks while acting no influence on the linear forwarding performance of the switch 4 9 11 1 Global DoS Setti
139. cription e SNTP Server Address Type the IP address or domain name of the SNTP server e Server Port Type the port number of the SNTP Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes SNTP Server Informations Information Name Information Value SNTP Server Port 123 Figure 4 2 11 SNTP Server Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNTP Server Address Display the current SNTP server address e Server Port Display the current SNTP server port 62 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 2 6 Log Management The Managed Switch log management is provided here The local logs allow you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels O to 3 to be logged to flash and levels O to 6 to be logged to RAM The following table lists the event levels of the Managed Switch Level Severity Name Description Wolke normat out sgriteart coraan soen Waring Waring contin eg meest C ma Error conditions e g invalid input default used Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 Immediate action needed System unusable 4 2 6 1 Local Log The switch system local log information is provided here The local Log screens in Figure 4 2 12 amp Figure 4 2 13 appear Logging Settings Enabled Disabled
140. d 314 4 13 1 Cable Re Te 314 AEB PUIG EEN 316 Aono PING OSU EEN 316 lo MG PINO Ve EE 317 SN STANS EE 318 SEA e ME 319 E E WEE 319 AAA RMON Ey EE 321 4 14 3 RMON Event Log WE 322 2 322 RMON AII EE 323 AA TION PISO EE 326 e 146 RMON History LOG E 327 4 15 Power over ES EE eege GEES 328 4 15 1 Power over Ethernet Powered DeVICGC c csscccsesseeccsseressssersnonseeensnersceaserenousenesauereacasenenoneeseseueesanasereneasess 329 a Miss de SCT COMMING AIO EE 330 4 15 3 Power over Ethernet Copnfguraton nnne nnne nnne nhan nn nns nre na annes naar nnns 331 EE Eeer 334 4 15 5 PoE Alive Check Configuration m E 337 4 16 Maintenance e c 339 AEG etl Der A MP DE 339 4 16 2 Reboot SWItCH ee ne ne en a Oe eee er eee 340 4 16 39 Back p Ee TEE 340 A164 ee ee e TEE 341 ANG Oa MM e EE 342 5 SWITCH OPERATION EE 344 5 1 Address EE 344 eZ ECAN e D 344 5 3 F rwarding amp Filtering TTE 344 a PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 34 EE en E FON al o BEEN TE ETT 344 SOAU ING GO LIAUIOND E 345 6 TROUBLESHOOTING racers sere sce E ee sg eee eee eee eee es 346 APPENDIX A Switch s RJ45 Pin Assignments ccccsscceeeeseeceeseeeeneseneeeeeenesenesenesenes 348 A 11000MDp5 Uic 348 A 2 10 100Mbps 10 TOOBASE LX uixsexas xukce
141. d Series PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Location Coordinate A string identifying the Location Coordinate that this entry should belong to e Location Civic A string identifying the Location Civic Address that this entry should belong to Address e Location ESC ELIN A string identifying the Location ESC ELIN that this entry should belong to Buttons Apply Click to apply changes LLDP MED Port Location Table Figure 4 12 15 LLDP MED Port Location Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Coordinate Display the current coordinate e Civic Address Display the current civic address e ESC ELIN Display the current ESC ELIN 310 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 12 8 LLDP Overloading User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The LLDP Port Overloading screen in Figure 4 12 16 appears LLDP Port Overloading Table Not en je 1440 SST 21 Transmitted B Transmitted Be 10 Transmitted RH i E B Transmitted Not 1440 Overloading 21 Transmitted B Transmitted un 1 Transmitte d Sots B Transmitted GE3 1440 ius 21 Transmitted B Transmitted 1 Transmitte d Overloading Not l Not The page includes the following fields 1440 me 21 Transmitted B Transmitted Overloading Not 14
142. d operating at Green 1000Mbps LNK ACT Blinks To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 31 2 1 3 Physical Dimensions PLANET Networking amp Communication WGS 804HPT Dimensions WxDxH User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 148 x 25 x 134mm OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O OOoOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O OOoOoOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 134 00 118 00 148 00 24 20 133 00 patas Power e gt PoE Power adr PoE In Use Usage W b 9 LNK ACT 1200 bi 30 Q 600 Q PLANET Networking amp Communication Industrial 8 Port Gigabit Managed Switch with 4 Port PoE 4 1000 pe LNK s ACT OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOoOOOOOOOOOO o oooooooo o ooo ooooo0oo0oo0oo0000000 00000000000 Dimensions unit mm 32 WGS 4215 8T u Dimensions W x D x H 148 x 25 x 134mm User s Manual of WGS Managed Series OOoOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Oo O OOOO OOOO OOoOoOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O0OO ooocoocooo0oo0oo0000000000000 148 00 24 20 133 00 p gt 1000 ek ACT 4 10100 LNK ACT Q PLANET Networking amp Communication 134 00 118 00 Industrial 8 Port Gigabit Managed Switch WGS 4215 8T Input Range b 1000 LNK ACT DC 12V 48V 4 10100 9INK ACT AC 24V OOoOOOOOOO OOoOOOOOOOOOOO OOoOOOOOOO OOO0O0OOO
143. ddress is Present 165 PLANET Networking amp Communication 006 Membership Report version 2 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Leave a Group version 2 00x02 Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Non Member Leave Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Received Delaying Member Daer
144. deo Conferencing application policy VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default 306 e PLANET Networking amp Communication DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Buttons User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Appl
145. dge Display the current regional root bridget e Internal Root Cost Display the current internal root cost e Designated Bridge Display the current designated bridge e Internal Path Cost Display the current internal path cost e Port Role Display the current port role e Port State Display the current port state 160 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 6 8 STP Statistics User s Manual of WGS Managed Series This page displays STP statistics The STP statistics screen in Figure 4 6 17 appears Y STP Statistics Figure 4 6 17 STP Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Configuration BPDUs Received e TCN BPDUs Received e MSTP BPDUs Received e Configuration BPDUs Transmitted e TCN BPDUs Transmitted e MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Description The switch port number of the logical STP port Display the current configuration BPDUs received Display the current TCN BPDUS received Display the current MSTP BPDUS received Display the configuration BPDUs transmitted Display the current TCN BPDUs transmitted Display the current BPDUs transmitted 161 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 7 Multicast This section has the following items E Properties Configures multicast properties E IGMP Snooping Configures IGMP snooping settings E IGMP Snooping Statistics Display the IGMP snooping statistics z MLD Snooping Configures ML
146. dicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 1 to 255 Buttons Add Click to add a new SNMPv1 2 host entry SNMPV1 2 Host Status Figure 4 2 32 SNMPv1 2 Host Status Page Screenshot e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Display the current server address e SNMP Version Display the current SNMP version e Notify Type Display the current notify type e Community Name Display the current community name e UDP Port Display the current UDP port e Time Out Display the current time out e Retries Display the current retry times e Action Delete Delete the SNMPv1 2 host entry 4 2 7 8 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients Configure SNMPv3 notification recipients on this page The SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4 2 33 amp Figure 4 2 34 appear SNMPv3 Host Setting Server Address Notify Type UDP Port Retries me wa mese 5o wanl vz Add Figure 4 2 33 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e Notify Type Set the notify type in traps or informs e User Name Indicates the user s
147. ding the user access and management control The Security Page contains links to the following main topics a 802 1x Radius Server TACACS Server AAA Access Management Access Method DHCP Snooping Dynamic ARP Inspection IP Source Guard Port Security DoS Strom Control 4 9 1 802 1X Overview of 802 1X Port based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it
148. direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The SSH Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 23 amp Figure 4 9 24 appear 231 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication SSH Settings Disabled Ki default w 10 0 66636 minutes 3 0 120 minutes 0 0 65535 seconds Apply Disconnect Figure 4 9 23 SSH Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SSH Service Disable or enable SSH service e Login Authentication List Select login authentication list from this drop down list e Enable Authentication List Select enable authentication list from this drop down list e Session Timeout Set the session timeout value e Password Retry Count Set the password retry count value e Silent Time Set the silent time value Buttons Apply Click to apply change
149. down and keep in detection mode until PD s power consumption is lower than the power limit value 333 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 15 4 PoE Schedule This page allows the user to define PoE schedule and scheduled power recycling PoE Schedule Besides being used as an IP Surveillance the Managed PoE switch is certainly applicable to construct any PoE network including VoIP and Wireless LAN Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to the environmental protection on the Earth the Managed PoE switch can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power The PoE schedule function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMB or Enterprise saving power and money 7 ale ke A 4 E 9 CL 0 P d T BAM F1 EPM EPM SAM E i dr Power Power Power om on 6 Watts E Watts 12 Watts 12 Watt Watts D Watts 12 Watts L Watts l Save 24 watts hr during off business hours ROR eee eee SIS NEN NT x Total Saved 10800 Watts month Scheduled Power Recycling The Managed PoE switch allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras to reboot at a specified time each week Therefore it will reduce the chance of IP camera crash resulting from buffer overflow Aut
150. e Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Enabled Indicates the port state operation Possible state are Enabled Start up the port manually Disabled Shut down the port manually 82 PLANET Melworking amp Communication e Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode E Auto Setup Auto negotiation Auto 10M Setup 10M Auto negotiation Auto 100M Setup 100M Auto negotiation Auto 1000M Setup 1000M Auto negotiation Auto 10 100M Setup 10 100M Auto negotiation 10M Setup 10M Force mode 100M Setup 100M Force mode 1000M Setup 1000M Force mode e Duplex Select any available link duplex for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode m Auto Setup Auto negotiation a Full Force sets Full Duplex mode a Half Force sets Half Duplex mode e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is
151. e Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceeds the maximum permitted frame size e Symbol Errors The number of received and transmitted symbol errors e Control In Unknown The number of received control unknown opcodes Opcodes e In Pause Frames The number of received pause frames e Out Pause Frames The number of transmitted pause frames RMON Counters Counters Value Drop Events Octets Packets Broadcast Packets Multicast Packets CRE Alignment Errors Undersize Packets Oversize Packets Fragments Jabbers Collisions b4 Bytes Frame 55 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames Figure 4 3 6 RMON Counters Page Screenshot Object Description e Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets received and transmitted on the interface including framing characters e Packets The total number of packets received and transmitted on the interface e Broadcast Packets The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets 87 e PLANET Networking amp Communication Multicast Packets CRC Alignment Errors Undersize Packets Oversize Packets Fragments Jabbers Collisions 64 Bytes Frames 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Fr
152. e current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the Managed Switch The IGMP Router Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 7 15 amp Figure 4 7 16 appear Add Router Port VLAN ID Static Ports Select Forbid Forts Select Type Select VLANs Static EN Select Static Ports dl Select Forbid Pons Add Figure 4 7 15 Add Router Port Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router e Type Sets the Router port type The types of Router port as below B Static B Forbid e Static Ports Select Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier e Forbid Port Select Specify which ports un act as router ports Buttons Add Click to add IGMP router port entry Figure 4 7 16 Router Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 172 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Static Ports Display the current static ports e Forbidden Ports Display the current forbidden ports S ee Click Edit to edit parameter Click Delete to delete the group ID entry 4 7 2 6 IGMP Router Tab
153. e field of LACP PDU description The field from left to right describes LACP Activity LACH Timeout 5 11 Aggregation 5 11 5 11 Synchronization Collecting Distributing Defaulted and 111 r PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Expired The contents could be true or false If the contents are false the web will show 5 if the contents are true the Web shows A T G S C D F and E for each content respectively 112 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 5 VLAN 4 5 1 VLAN Overview A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on t
154. e following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Temperature Display the current SFP temperature e Voltage Display the current SFP voltage e Current Display the current SFP current e Output Power Display the current SFP output power e Input Power Display the current SFP input power e Transmit Fault Display the current SFP transmits fault e Loss of Signal Display the current SFP loss of signal e Rate Ready Display the current SFP rate ready 101 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 4 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed suplex setting etc The device supp
155. e includes the following fields Object Description e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes Engine ID Status Information Name Information Value Enabled 80006 a92030000304f1122 Use Default Engine ID Figure 4 2 36 SNMPv3 Engine ID Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Default Display the current status e Engine ID Display the current engine ID 4 2 7 10 SNMP Remote Engine ID Configure SNMPv3 remote Engine ID on this page The SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4 2 37 amp Figure 4 2 38 appear Remote EnginelD Setting Add Figure 4 2 37 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot 80 d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Remote IP Address Indicates the SNMP remote engine ID address It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to Buttons Appl AA Click to apply changes Remote Engine ID Status Remote IP Address Remote Engine ID Action Figure 4 2 38 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Status Pa
156. e only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients e Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client Ej Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a p
157. e starting month Hours Select the starting hour Minutes Select the starting minute Week Select the starting week number Day Select the starting day Month Select the starting month Hours Select the starting hour Minutes Select the starting minute 60 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series System Time Informations The page includes the following fields Information Name Information Value Current Date Time OSE als WO s E T PS ent Krop Ell n BIB SNTP Disabled Daylight Saving Time Daylight Saving Time Offset fom dC NI WS Object Current Data Time SNTP Time Zone Daylight Saving Time Daylight Saving Time Offset From To Figure 4 2 9 Time Information Page Screenshot Description Display the current data time Display the current SNTP state Display the current time zone Display the current daylight saving time state Display the current daylight saving time offset state Display the current daylight saving time from Display the current daylight saving time to 61 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 2 5 2 SNTP Server Settings The SNTP Server Configuration screens in Figure 4 2 10 amp Figure 4 2 11 appear SNTP Server Settings SNTP Server Address o NNN or Hostname 1 65596 Default 123 Apply Figure 4 2 10 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Des
158. e to hardware limitations Pv4 based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 5 amp Figure 4 10 6 appear IPv4 Based ACL ACL Name Add Figure 4 10 5 IPv4 based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ACL Name Create a named IPv4 based ACL list Buttons Add l Click to add ACL name list ACL Table Figure 4 10 6 ACL Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Click Delete to delete ACL name entry 2 6 PLANET 5 otwartiag Reeg User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 10 4 IPv4 based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The IPv4 based ACE screens in Figure 4 10 7 amp Figure 4 10 8 appear IPv4 Based ACE 0 tRange 1 2147483647 1 is first processed 9 Permit O Deny Shutdown 9 Any IP Select fram list Protocol ID to match Any Q user Defined sf far matching 1s for no matching Any O user Defined o Os for matching 1s for no matching 9 Any O Single EI Range 0 65535 ORange Range D 65535 Any SinglefRange D 55535 ORange Range 0 65535 Range 0 65535 IR j jo Les Range 0 65538 Urg Set OuUnset ODon t Care Ack G Set OUnset ODon t Care Psh Set OUnset ODon t Care Hat GO set Ounset
159. e voice equipment always belong to Voice VLAN when relocated physically The greatest advantage of the VLAN is the equipment can be automatically placed into Voice VLAN according to its voice traffic which will be transmitted at specified priority Meanwhile when voice equipment is physically relocated it still belongs to the Voice VLAN without any further configuration modification which is because it is based on voice equipment other than switch port The Voice VLAN feature enables the voice traffic to forward on the Voice VLAN and then the switch can be classified and scheduled to network traffic It is recommended there are two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI 206 Networking A Communication 4 8 5 2 Properties User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic to forward on the Voice VLAN and then the switch can be classified and scheduled to network traffic It is recommended that there are two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble The Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting Status screen in Figure 4 8 22 a
160. eboot Only e Reboot Hour e Reboot Min Buttons User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Allows user to set what minute PoE function does by enabling it Allows user to set what hour PoE function does by disabling it Allows user to set what minute PoE function does by disabling it Allows user to enable or disable the whole PoE port reboot by PoE reboot schedule Please note that if you want PoE schedule and PoE reboot schedule to work at the same time please use this function and don t use Reboot Only function This function offers administrator to reboot PoE device at an indicated time if administrator has this kind of requirement Allows user to reboot PoE function by PoE reboot schedule Please note that if administrator enables this function POE schedule will not set time to profile This function is just for PoE port to reset at an indicated time Allows user to set what hour PoE reboots This function is only for PoE reboot schedule Allows user to set what minute PoE reboots This function is only for PoE reboot schedule Add New Rule Add New Rule Click to add new rule APPIY J Click to apply changes Dele Check to delete the entry 336 PLANET H User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Metworking amp Communication 4 15 5 PoE Alive Check Configuration The WGS PoE Managed Switch Series can be configured to monitor connected PD s status in real time via ping action Once the PD stops work
161. ed Buttons Apply Click to apply changes MLD Snooping Informations Information Name Information Value MLD Snooping Status Disable Figure 4 7 22 MLD Snooping information Page Screenshot 177 The page includes the following fields e PLANET Networking amp Communication Object MLD Snooping Status MLD Snooping Version MLD Snooping Report Suppression User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Display the current MLD snooping status Display the current MLD snooping version Display the current MLD snooping report suppression MLD Snooping Table Router Learn disabled enabled Ports Auto Query Query icc Ain Last Member Oo 2e Imme diate Robustness Interval sec P Query count Leave ME Scams eee o disabled MLD Snooping G i Operation Status Dt The page includes the following fields Object Entry No VLAN ID MLD Snooping Operation Status Router Ports Auto Learn Query Robustness Query Interval sec Query Max Response Interval sec Last Member Query count Last Member Query Interval sec Immediate Leave Modify Figure 4 7 23 MLD Snooping Table Page Screenshot Description Display the current entry number Display the current VLAN ID Display the current MLD snooping operation status Display the current router ports auto learning Display the current query robustness Display the current query interval Display the
162. ed don t care ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care RST Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry 285 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication IE B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames w
163. ed 9 Untagged ica Forbidden Excluded Tagged 9 Untagged ici Figure 4 5 7 Port to VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list to assign VLAN membership e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Interface VLAN Mode Display the current interface VLAN mode e Membership Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the 124 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Apply PVID Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port Display the current PVID 4 5 7 Port VLAN Membership This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4 5 8 appears Port VLAN
164. ed and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements is reduced Edit Interface Setting The Edit Interface Setting Status screens in Figure 4 5 5 amp Figure 4 5 6 appear Edit Interface Setting Select Ports GO Hybrid O amp ccess OTrunk O 1 d all OTag Only O untag Enabled O Enabled Tunnel 4094 Only Disabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 5 5 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot 121 The page includes the following fields Buttons Apply Object e Port Select e Interface VLAN Mode e PVID e Accepted Type e Ingress Filtering e Uplink e TPID Networking amp Communication Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Select port number from this drop down list to set VLAN port setting Set the port in access trunk hybrid and tunnel mode B Trunk means the port allows traffic of multiple VLANs B Access indicates the port b
165. efault value is Disabled e IGMP Snooping Version Sets the IGMP Snooping operation version Possible versions are B v2 Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 2 B v3 Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 3 e IGMP Snooping Report Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast capable routers Suppression When you disable report suppression all IGMP reports are sent as is to multicast capable routers The default is enabled Buttons Appl dai Click to apply changes 167 PLANET Melworking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series IGMP Snooping Informations Information Name Information Value Figure 4 7 8 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IGMP Snooping Status Display the current IGMP snooping status e IGMP Snooping Version Display the current IGMP snooping version IGMP Snooping V2 Report Display the current IGMP snooping v2 report suppression Suppression IGMP Snooping Table IGMP Snooping PUT Query Query PT MEN Last Member ERN Mamia Immediate 0 don Stat Ports Auto Robust lat l Response Q t Query 1 peration Status sarn obustness Interval sec Intervalisec uery coun Intervalisec eave Ed Figure 4 7 9 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Entry No Display the current entry number e VLAN ID Display the curre
166. el B Cablelength B Channel C Cable Length Channel D Cable Length D Figure 4 13 2 Test Results Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics e Channel A D Display the current channel status e Cable Length A D Display the current cable length e Result Display the test result e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 13 2 Ping The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The Managed Switch transmits ICMP packets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply 4 13 3 Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press Apply ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 13 3 appears Ping Test Setting IP Address 1 6 Default 4 quie 1 5 Default 1 X X X X ar hostname Size in bytes 8 5120 Default 56 Ping Results Apply Figure 4 13 3 ICMP Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Count Number of ech
167. elds Object Description e Flash Partition Display the current flash partition e Image Name Display the current image name 342 J PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication e Image Size Display the current image size e Created Time Display the created time 343 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 5 SWITCH OPERATION 5 1 Address Table The Switch is implemented with an address table This address table is composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some nodes on the network including MAC address port no etc This information comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch 5 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Switch will record the source address port number and the other related information in the address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 5 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Ethernet Switching will look up the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is
168. elongs to one VLAN only B Hybrid means the port allows the traffic of multi VLANSs to pass in tag or untag mode B Tunnel configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling for a downlink port to another device within the customer network Allows you to assign PVID to selected port The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must be the same as the VLAN ID that the port belongs to VLAN group or the untagged traffic will be dropped The range for the PVID is 1 4094 Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded Options B All B Tag Only B Untag Only By default the field is set to All e f ingress filtering is enabled checkbox is checked frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of get discarded e f ingress filtering is disabled frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine However the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of Enable disable uplink function in trunk port Configure the type TPID of the protocol of switch trunk port 122 PLANET Watwarking amp Communication Port VLAN Status User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Port Interface VLAN Mode PVID Accept Frame T 71D
169. ely mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Mirror Application Port Mirroring Tx 101010 Rx 111000 Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 3 8 Port Mirror Application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 9 amp Figure 4 3 10 appear Mirror Setting GEI Disable wisi Figure 4 3 9 Port Mirroring Settings Page Screenshot 90 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The page includes the following fields Object Buttons Apply Session ID Monitor Session State Destination Port Allow ingress Sniffer TX Ports Sniffer RX Ports Click to apply changes Description Set the port mirror session ID Possible ID are 1 to 4 Enable or disable the port mirroring function Select the port to mirror destination port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port Frames transmitted from these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received
170. ely sending or receiving data over that port Lights To indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps Off If LNK ACT LED is Off it indicates that the port is link down or operating at 10 100Mbps B PoE Power Usage Unit Watt LED Color Function 28 Green Lights TO indicate the system consumes over 30 watt PoE power budget 60 Green Lights T0 indicate the system consumes over 60 watt PoE power budget 90 Green Lights T0 indicate the system consumes over 90 watt PoE power budget 120 Green Lights TO indicate the system consumes over 120 watt PoE power budget 29 PLANET i amp User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication p 1000 IS ACT 10 100 LNK ACT e PLANET Networking amp Communication Industrial 8 Port Gigabit Managed Switch Ground Input Range 1000 LNK ACT DC 12V 48V K 10 100 LNK ACT AC 24V Figure 2 1 2b WGS 4215 8T LED Panel B System Function Lights to indicate that the Switch has power B 10 100 1000BASE T Interfaces Port 1 to Port 8 LED Color Function 10 100 To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at Orange 10 100Mbps LNK ACT To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 1000 Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at 1000Mbps LNK ACT Blinks To indicate that the switch is actively sendin
171. ement applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements Workstations running Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista 7 8 2008 MAC OS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platforms are compatible with TCP IP protocols Workstation is installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card Ethernet Port connection e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors The above Workstation is installed with Web browser and Java runtime environment plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8 0 or above to access Managed Switch 41 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 3 2 Management Access Overview The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods a Web browser interface B An external SNMP based network management application The Web browser interfaces are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Advantages Disadv
172. emote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user has to re login the Web interface for about 60 seconds The Reboot Switch screen in Figure 4 16 2 appears and click to reboot the system Reboot Figure 4 16 2 Reboot Switch Page Screenshot 4 16 3 Backup Manager This function allows backup of the current image or configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Backup Manager screen in Figure 4 16 3 appears Backup Manager Backup Method TFIF v 9 mage O Running configuration Startup configuration O Backup configuration OFlash log O Buffered lag wmlinux poe test bix Active O vmlinux poe test hix Backup Backup Backup Type Figure 4 16 3 Backup Manager Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Backup Method Select backup method from this drop down list e Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Backup Type Select backup type e Image Select active or backup image Buttons Backup Click to back up image configuration or log 340 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 16 4 Upgrade Manager This function allows reloading of the current image or configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Upgrade Manager screen in Figure 4 16 4 appears Upgrade Manager Image Startup Configuration Backup Configuration O Running Configuration OrActive B
173. enshot 133 d PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Invalid Protocol ID Display the current invalid protocol ID e Invalid Attribute Type Display the current invalid attribute type e Invalid Attribute Value Display the current invalid attribute value e Invalid Attribute Display the current invalid attribute length Length e Invalid Event Display the current invalid event Buttons Clear a Click to clear the GVRP Error Statistics Refresh Click to refresh the GVRP Error Statistics 134 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 5 14 VLAN setting example Separate VLANs 802 1Q VLAN Trunk 4 5 14 1 Two separate 802 1Q VLANs The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLANs Each VLAN isolates network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 5 20 appears and Table 4 5 2 describes the port configuration of the Managed Switches REN H EE EE E 1 I f d Em l I NEN I I I E T i I I n n i Fa I l I I Ar PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Untagged Tagged i Untagged Untagged Tagged
174. eral query RX Display current special group query RX Display current special group amp source query RX Display current leave TX Display current report TX Display current general query TX Display current special group query TX Display current special group amp source query TX Click to clear the IGMP Snooping Statistics Refresh Click to refresh the IGMP Snooping Statistics 176 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 7 4 MLD Snooping 4 7 4 1 MLD Setting This page provides MLD Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit as reflected by the page header The MLD Snooping Setting Information and Table screens in Figure 4 7 21 Figure 4 7 22 amp Figure 4 7 23 appear MLD Snooping Figure 4 7 21 MLD Snooping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MLD Snooping Status Enable or disable the MLD snooping The default value is Disabled e MLD Snooping Version Sets the MLD Snooping operation version Possible versions are v1 Set MLD Snooping supported MLD version 1 v2 Set MLD Snooping supported MLD version 2 e MLD Snooping Report Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast capable routers When you Suppression disable report suppression all MLD reports are sent as is to multicast capable routers The default is enabl
175. es the following fields Object Description e Select Index Select index from this drop down list to create the new index or modify the index e Index Indicates the index of the history entry e Sample Port Select port from this drop down list e Bucket Requested Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 50 default value is 50 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds e Owner Specify an owner for the history Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Data Source Bucket Requested Interval Figure 4 14 8 RMON History Status Page Screenshot 326 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Index Display the current index e Data Source Display the current data source e Bucket Requested Display the current bucket requested e Interval Display the current interval e Owner Display the current owner e Action Delet Click to delete RMON history entry 4 14 6 RMON History Log This page provides a detail of RMON history entries screen in Figure 4 14 9 appears RMON History Table History Index select History Ve No data avaliable Figure 4 14 9 RMON History Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Desc
176. ess Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application The ACL page contains links to the following main topics E MAC based ACL Configuration MAC based ACL setting E MAC based ACE Add Edit Delete the MAC based ACE Access Control Entry setting a IPv4 based ACL Configuration IPv4 based ACL setting En IPv4 based ACE Add Edit Delete the IPv4 based ACE Access Control Entry setting ii IPv6 based ACL Configuration IPv6 based ACL setting E IPv6 based ACE Add Edit Delete the IPv6 based ACE Access Control Entry setting Si ACL Binding Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port 271 8 PLANET Wetworking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 10 1 MAC based ACL This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations MAC based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 1 amp Figure 4 10 2 appear MAC Based ACL Add Figure 4 10 1 MAC based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ACL Name Create a named MAC based ACL list ACL Table ACL Table Figure 4 10 2 ACL Ta
177. eue to IP Precedence Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 10 amp Figure 4 8 11 appear IP Precedence to Queue Mapping Queue to IP Precedence Mapping Apply Figure 4 8 10 IP Precedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 199 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication Object Description e Queue Select Queue value from this drop down list e IP Precedence Select IP Precedence value from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes IP Precedence mapping IP Precedence SS to Queue E Figure 4 8 11 IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Precedence Display the current CoS value e Mapping to Queue Display the current mapping to queue e Queue Display the current queue value e Mapping to IP Display the current mapping to IP Precedence Precedence 200 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 8 3 QoS Basic Mode 4 8 3 1 Global Settings The Basic Mode Global Settings and QoS Information screen in Figure 4 8 12 amp Figure 4 8 13 appear Basic Mode Global Settings cos 802 19 ODscP Ocos 802 1p DSCP OIP Precedence ONone Apply Figure 4 8 12 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trust Mode Set the QoS mode B
178. f Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 6 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 2 000 000 1 999 999 1 000 000 200 000 100 000 50 000 Table 4 6 2 Recommended STP Path Costs Port Type Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Full Duplex Trunk Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 2 000 000 1 000 000 500 000 200 000 100 000 50 000 Table 4 6 3 Default STP Path Costs 151 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication CIST Port Status Port Admin Enable eemi cot riet mme msn paeme em Jmm e ee e e LLL s mm ied Ses em mee p Iw IN d d Yes LAUD Lavig INU TTO Figure 4 6 7 STP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e Admin Enable Display the current STP port mode status e External Cost Display the current external cost e Edge Port Display the current edge port status e BPDU Filter Display the current BPDU filter configuration e BPDU Guard Display the current BPDU guard configuration e P2P MAC Display the current P2P MAC status 152 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking A Communication 4 6 4 CIST Instance Setting This Page allows you to configure
179. f WGS Managed Series Description Display the current DHCP state Display the current IP address Display the current subnet mask Display the current gateway Display the current DNS server The IPv6 Configuration includes Auto Configuration IPv6 Address and Gateway The configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration Fill out the Auto Configuration IPv6 Address and Gateway for the device The screens in Figure 4 2 4 amp Figure 4 2 5 appear IPv6 Address Setting Auto Configuration O Disable G Enahle DHCPv Client 9Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 2 4 IPv6 Address Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Auto Configuration e Pv6 Address Description Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If it fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example 1e80 215 cb5ff fe03 Adc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also uses the following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2
180. fault password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 192 168 0 254 2 1 2 LED Indications The front panel LEDs indicate instant status of port links data activity and system power it helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed Figure 2 1 2a 2 1 2c show the LED indications of these Managed Switches GS 804HPT LED Indication ANEIL EE RM Power lt amp amp _ _ _ PoE Power qe PoE In Use Usage W p LNK ACT D ER C Q PLANET Networking amp Communication Industrial 8 Port Gigabit Managed Switch with 4 Port PoE qe 1000 DC pend Range ke LNK x ACT 48V Figure 2 1 2a WGS 804HPT LED Panel 28 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication B System LED Color Function O pwr Green Lights to indicate that the Switch has power Mi PoE 10 100 1000BASE T Interfaces Port 1 to Port 4 LED Color Function To indicate the link through that port is successfully established LNK ACT To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Lights To indicate the port is providing DC in line power Orange Off To indicate the connected device is not a PoE Powered Device PD B 10 100 1000BASE T Interfaces Port 5 to Port 8 LED Color Function To indicate the link through that port is successfully established LNK ACT To indicate that the switch is activ
181. figuration This page provides to set port error disable function The Port Error Disable Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 13 amp Figure 4 3 14 appear Error Disabled Recovery zm Geconts O Enabled Disabled OEnabled Disabled OEnabled Disabled OEnabled Disabled O Enabled Disabled OEnabled Disabled OEnabled Disabled O Enabled Disabled QOEnabled Disabled Figure 4 3 13 Error Disabled Recovery Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Recovery Interval BPDU Guard Self Loop Broadcast Flood Unknown Multicast Flood Unicast Flood ACL Port Security Violation DHCP Rate Limit ARP Rate Limit Description The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a port error is detected and the port action shuts down the port Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by BPDU guard Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by self loop Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by broadcast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unknown multicast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unicast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ACL Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by port security violation Enable or disable the p
182. filter for this ACE B Any No source IP address filter is specified B User Defined If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the source IP address filter you can enter a specific source IP address The legal format is XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX A frame that hits this ACE matches this source IP address value When User Defined is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP prefix length in dotted decimal notation Specify the Destination IP address filter for this ACE B Any No destination IP address filter is specified B User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the destination IP address filter you can enter a specific destination IP address The legal format is XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP address value When User Defined is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP prefix length in dotted decimal notation Specify the source port for this ACE B Any No specific source port is specified source port status is don t care B Single If you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE you can e
183. for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree a Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used a The unique switch identifier RS The path cost to the root associated with each switch port E The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch a The path cost to the root from the transmitting port 141 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication a The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUS results in the following a One switch is elected as the root switch a The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch B A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded
184. forom orao GE GE4 GES GER GEF EB GES Figure 4 9 72 Storm Control Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Port State Display the current port state e Broadcast Kbps pps Display the current broadcast storm control rate e Unknown Multicast Display the current unknown multicast storm control rate Kbps pps e Unknown Unicast Display the current unknown unicast storm control rate Kbps pps e Action Display the current action 2 0 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 10 ACL ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Acc
185. ful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States EH Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below Authentication server RADIUS Server Authentication server TACACS Server Authenticator PLANET 802 1 aware Switch C Internet Intranet Supplicant Client with 802 1X authentication Figure 4 9 1 213 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication e Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification e Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is th
186. g MAC addresses stored in the binding table e Max Binding Entry The maximum number of IP source guard that can be secured on this port Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes 259 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Melworking amp Communication IP Source Guard Port Information Pot Status Verify Source Max Binding Entry Current Binding Entry U No limited Ip LAGb disabled e Figure 4 9 61 IP Source Guard Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Status Display the current status e Verify Source Display the current verify source e Max Binding Entry Display the current max binding entry e Current Binding Entry Display the current binding entry 260 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 9 2 Binding Table The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4 9 62 amp Figure 4 9 63 appear ERI source Guard siete Binding Entry VLAN ID MACAddress Address IP Address C Add Figure 4 9 62 IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e MAC Address Sourcing MAC address is allowed e IP Address Sourcing IP address
187. g or receiving data over that port 30 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication WGS 4215 8T2S LED Indication Input DC 12V 48V AC 24V V4 AC SFP DC Input Range EE 3 Q PLANET V 48V 1000 LNK ACT 100 AVIS ACT Networking amp Communication Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch p 1000 e LNK ACT 4 10 100 LNK ACT Figure 2 1 2c WGS 4215 8T2S LED Panel B System LED Color Function PWR Green Lights to indicate that the Switch has power HM 10 100 1000BASE T Interfaces Port 1 to Port 4 LED Color Function 40 100 To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at Orange 100Mbps PANEEL i To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 1000 Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at Green 1000Mbps LNK ACT e P l Blinks To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port E 100 1000BASE X Interfaces Port 5 to Port 8 LED Leo e Function To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at 10 100Mbps To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Orange LNK ACT 1000 Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established an
188. ge Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Remote IP Address Display the current remote IP address e Engine ID Display the current engine ID e Action Delete Delete the remote IP address entry B e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 3 Port Management Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items B Port Configuration Configures port configuration settings a Port Counters Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics E Bandwidth Utilization Displays current bandwidth utilization m Port Mirroring Sets the source and target ports for mirroring a Jumbo Frame Sets the jumbo frame on the switch E Port Error Disable Configures port error disable settings Configuration E Port Error Disabled Status Disables port error status n Protected Ports Configures protected ports settings a EEE Configures EEE settings 2 SFP Module Information Displays SFP module information 4 3 1 Port Configuration This page displays current port configurations and status Ports can also be configured here The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in a number of columns which are The Port Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 1 amp Figure 4 3 2 appear Fort settings Port Select Enabled Flow Contro Fiber Ports Anuto DPOOM ze O Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 3 1 Port Settings Pag
189. ge of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMS s SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMS s Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMS s are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules Network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMS s SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMS s c
190. ge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ45 Connector pin assignment Contact MDI MDI X Media Dependent Interface Media Dependent Interface Cross 348 PLANET Networking amp Communication The standard cable RJ45 pin assignment User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The standard RJ45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight through Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 Crossover Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight through and Crossover Cable SIDE 2 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 2 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue
191. ged Series configuration file to be startup config e Backup Configuration The backup configuration is empty in FLASH please save the backup configuration first by Maintenance gt Backup Manager Buttons Appl PPY Click to save configuration 4 1 2 1 Saving Configuration In the Managed Switch the running configuration file stores in the RAM In the current version the running configuration sequence of running config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by Save Configurations to FLASH function so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup configuration file which is called configuration save To save all applied changes and set the current configuration as a startup configuration The startup configuration file will be loaded automatically across a system reboot 1 Click Save gt Save Configurations to FLASH to login Configuration Manager page SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH Restore ta Defaulbz 2 Select Source File Running Configuration and Destination File Startup Configuration save Configuration 9 Running configuration Source File O Startup canfiguratian O Backup configuration Destination File 9 Startup GEN Backup configuration Apply 3 Press the Apply button to save running configuration to startup configuration 52 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 2 System Use the System
192. ged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 Setup Steps 1 Create VLAN Group 2 and 3 Add VLAN group 2 and group 3 VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type 2 Assign VLAN mode and PVID to each port Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 3 136 e veran iecur User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Port VLAN Status ES pp m se mu E E My ES E GER Hybrid ALL VLAN ID 2 Port 1 amp 2 Untagged Port 3 Tagged Port 4 6 Excluded Port to VLAN Settings VLAN ID oes mea 3 Oromiden O Excluded CO Tagged _O Untagged VLAN ID 3 Port 4 amp 5 Untagged Port 6 Tagged Port 1 3 Excluded Port to VLAN Settings M Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged GE1 Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged 9 Untagged GEB Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged Dp 137 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 5 14 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switches In most cases they are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 5 21 appears PC 2 PC 3 untagged Tagged PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Tagged mm ms ms e
193. grayed out and thus impossible to enable EEE for The EEE port settings relate to the currently unit as reflected by the page header When a port is powered down for saving power outgoing traffic is stored in a buffer until the port is powered up again Because there are some overhead in turning the port down and up more power can be saved if the traffic can be buffered up until a large burst of traffic can be transmitted Buffering traffic will give some latency in the traffic The EEE Port Settings screen in Figure 4 3 18 amp Figure 4 3 19 appears EEE Port Settings Apply Figure 4 3 18 EEE Port Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Enable Enable or disable the EEE function Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 98 PLANET Networking amp Communication EEE Enable Status nu mae User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Figure 4 3 19 EEE Enable Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e EEE State Display the current EEE state 4 3 10 SFP Module Information Managed switch has supported the SFP module with digital diagnostics monitoring DDM function this feature is also known as digital optical monitoring DOM You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information
194. he interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Note Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three
195. he network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated VLAN Overview i EY CUM i i jp d I I A l I I i l d I I i J I I I i i I TE i d poc I l E i I i i poc I i Pg I poOM I Pg PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 E PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 I Untagged Untagged Tagged 1 Untagged Untagged Tagged I I l i i I I VLAN 2 VLAN 3 KE J he eg mm mm mm mm mg wm mm mg wm mm Ur mg me mg mm mg mg wm mg wm mm he wm mm em mm mm SS mm em mm SS SS SS mm mm Im mm en mm mm em mm mm 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN 2 The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware The Managed Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT VLAN port member list The DEFAULT VLAN has a VID 1 113 PLANET Networking amp Communication This section has the following items User s Manual of WGS Managed Series E Management VLAN Configures
196. here the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care e Type of Service Specify the type of service for this ACE B Any No specific type of service is specified destination port status is don t care B DSCP If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE you can enter a specific DSCP value A field for entering a DSCP value appears The allowed range is 0 to 63 A frame that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value B IP Precedence If you want to filter a specific IP precedence with this ACE you can enter a specific IP precedence value A field for entering an IP precedence value appears The allowed range is 0 to 7 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP precedence value e ICMP Specify the ICMP for this ACE B Any No specific ICMP is specified destination port status is don t care B List If you want to filter a specific list with this ACE you can select a specific list value B Protocol ID If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE you can enter a specific protocol ID value A field for entering a protocol ID value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this protocol ID value e ICMP Code Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE B Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care B User Defined If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you
197. hich additional PDs cannot be connected When this value is exceeded ports will be deactivated according to user defined priorities The power budget is managed according to the following user definable parameters maximum available power ports priority and maximum allowable power per port Reserved Power There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports B Classification mode In this mode each port automatic determines how much power to reserve according to the class the connected PD belongs to and reserves the power accordingly Four different port classes exist and one for 4 7 15 4 and 30 8 watts Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD Class Description Default 0 44 to 12 95 watts Classification unimplement Optional 0 44 to 3 84 watts Very low power Optional 3 84 to 6 49 watts Optional 6 49 to 12 95 watts or to 15 4 watts Optional 12 95 to 25 50 watts or to 30 8 watts High power Table 4 16 1 Standard PoE Parameters and Comparison 1 In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect 2 The PoE chip of PD69004 designed to that Class level 0 will be assigned to 15 4 watts in AF mode and 30 8 watts in AT mode under classification power limit mode It is hardware limited B Allocation mode In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve The allocated reserved power for each port PD is specified in the Maximum Power field
198. his given port Default All interfaces are untrusted Enable or disable to checks the source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the sender MAC address in the ARP body This check is performed on both ARP requests and responses When enabled packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped Enable or disable to checks the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the target MAC address in ARP body This check is performed for ARP responses When enabled packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped Enable or disable to checks the source and destination IP addresses of ARP packets The all zero all one or multicast IP addresses are considered invalid and the corresponding packets are discarded Enable or disable to checks all zero IP addresses 254 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication DAI Port Setting Pa Type SrcMac Chk Dst MacChk IP Chk IP Allow Zero assez draebieg disabled dasz GE2 UnTrusted seals Sells arabe ess EE disabled disabled disabled disabled Un Trusted disabled disabled disabled disabled AGB Un Trusted mHreauimu disabled disabled disabled LAG iss E disebled e LAGE EE d an a Figure 4 9 55 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical
199. hreshold Falling Threshold Falling Event Owner Action Figure 4 14 6 RMON Alarm Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Index e Sample Port e Sample Variable e Sample Interval e Sample Type e Rising Threshold e Falling Threshold e Rising Event e Falling Event e Owner e Action User s Manual of WGS Managed Series B Delta Calculate the difference between samples Rising threshold value 0 2147483647 Falling threshold value 0 2147483647 Event to fire when the rising threshold is crossed Event to fire when the falling threshold is crossed Specify an owner for the alarm Description Indicates the index of Alarm control entry Display the current sample port Display the current sample variable Display the current interval Display the current sample type Display the current rising threshold Display the current falling threshold Display the current rising event Display the current falling event Display the current owner Click Delete to delete RMON alarm entry 325 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 14 5 RMON History Configure RMON History table on this page The RMON History screens in Figure 4 14 7 amp Figure 4 14 8 appear RMON History Create Mew 1 655535 1 50 Default 50 1 5600 Default 1600 U 31 Charactars Apply Figure 4 14 7 RMON History Table Page Screenshot The page includ
200. i l l d l I I VLAN 2 a VLAN 3 i J J s en en pm pm mm pm em mm ms em mm e mm e mm mm e mm e e em mm we Dn wn wm em wm em em em em zm pm em pm pm em mm mm Se em em em mm mm mn es Figure 4 5 20 Two Separate VLAN Diagrams VLAN Group 1 Table 4 5 2 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario described as follows E Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 1 transmits an untagged packet enters Port 1 the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will received the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 received no packet 135 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag72 H Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 3 transmits a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 enters Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 will receive the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 2 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet E Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 1 While PC 4 transmits an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and PC 6 will receive the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untag
201. icant Period 30 Range 1 85535 Default 30 Maximum Request Retries 2 Sange 10 Default 2 Figure 4 9 5 802 1X Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Mode If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available B No Authentication B Authentication B Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication B Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access e Reauthentication If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated Enable after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a 217 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Reauthentication Period e Quiet Period e Supplicant Period e Maximum Request Retries Buttons Apply Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only act
202. idge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 8 LAN 2 gt A LAN 3 Figure 4 6 2 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used A C Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port Se Designated Bridge 8 AN _ 8 amp LAN3 _ gt Figure 4 6 3 After Applying the STA Rules 146 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link This section has the following items Bl STP Global Setting Configures STP system settings B STP Port Setting Configuration per port STP setting B CIST Instance Setting Configure system configuration SI CIST Port Setting Configure CIST port setting m MST Instance Setting Configuration
203. iew log 67 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Logging Information Information Name Information Value f emerg alert crit error warning notice CS AAA ACL CABLE_DIAG DAI DHCP SNOOPING Dot1X GVRP IGMP SNOOPING IPSG L2 LLDP Mirror MLD_SNOOPING aic Platform PM Port PORT SECURITY QoS Rate SNMP STP Security suite System Trunk VLAN Figure 4 2 19 Logging Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Target Display the current log target e Severity Display the current log severity e Category Display the current log category e Total Entries Display the current log entries Logging Messages Clear buffered messages Refresh No rennen Severity Mee Jan 01 2000 08 00 19 Port gil link ur Figure 4 2 20 Logging Messages Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for logs e Timestamp Display the time of log e Category Display the category type e Severity Display the severity type e Message Display the log message Buttons Clear Click to clear the log Refresh Click to refresh the log 68 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 2 7 SNMP Management 4 2 7 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchan
204. ile ID Select Pors Apply Figure 4 7 40 Filter Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Filter Profile ID Select filter profile ID from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 190 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Wetworking amp Communication Port Filter Status Figure 4 7 41 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e Filter Profile ID Display the current filter profile ID e Action Click Show to display detail profile parameter Click Delete to delete the MLD filter profile entry 191 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 8 Quality of Service 4 8 1 Understanding QoS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat
205. includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Status Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are B Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports B Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Figure 4 9 36 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Display the current VLAN list e Status Display the current DHCP snooping status 241 e PLANET i User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 7 4 Port Setting Configures switch ports as trusted or untrusted Command Usage m A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall m When DHCP snooping enabled both globally and on a VLAN DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN m When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed B Set all ports connected to DHCP servers within the loca
206. ing and without response the PoE Switch is going to restart PoE port power and bring the PD back to work It will greatly enhance the reliability and reduces administrator management burden PD Status PT PoE Camera 33 EY c A Ping Request A 59D Ping Request Restart PoE device if without response This page provides you with how to configure PD Alive Check The screen in Figure 4 16 5 appears PD Alive Check PO Alive Check Apply Figure 4 15 5 PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Allows user to enable or disable per port PD Alive Check function By default all ports are disabled e Ping PD IP Address This column allows user to set PoE device IP address for system making ping to the PoE device Please note that the PD s IP address must be set to the same network segment with the PoE Switch 337 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication e Interval Time 10 300s This column allows user to set how long system should issue a ping request to PD for detecting whether PD is alive or dead Interval time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds e Retry Count 1 5 This column allows user to set the number of times system retries ping to PD For example if we set count 2 it means that if system retries ping to the PD and the PD doesn t response continuously the PoE port will be reset
207. innovative Industrial Wall mount Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch offers IPv6 IPv4 dual stack management intelligent Layer 2 management functions and user friendly interface The WGS managed series is able to operate reliably stably and quietly in any environment without affecting its performance Featuring ultra networking speed and operating temperature ranging from 40 to 75 degrees C in a compact but rugged IP30 metal housing the WGS managed series is an ideal solution to meeting the demand for the following network applications Building Home automation network Internet of things loT IP surveillance Wireless LAN Innovative Wall mount Installation The WGS managed series is specially designed to be installed in a narrow environment such as wall enclosure or electric weak box The compact flat and wall mounted design fits easily in any space limited location It adopts the user friendly Front Access design making the installing cable wiring LED monitoring and maintenance of the wall mount managed switch placed in an enclosure very convenient for technicians The WGS managed series can be installed by fixed wall mounting magnetic wall mounting or DIN rail thereby making its usability more flexible 4o ga Dual Power Input for High Availability Network System The WGS managed series features a strong dual power input system incorporated into customer s automation network to enhance system reliability and uptime In the exa
208. intain an accurate network topology 295 Networking amp Communication 4 12 2 LLDP Global Setting User s Manual of WGS Managed Series This Page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Global Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 12 1 amp Figure 4 12 2 appear Global Settings Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Enable e LLDP PDU Disable Action e Transmission Interval e Holdtime Multiplier Figure 4 12 1 Global Setting Page Screenshot Description Globally enable or disable LLDP function Set LLDP PDU disable action include Filtering Bridging and Flooding B Filtering discrad all LLDP PDU B Bridging transmit LLDP PDU in the same VLAN B Flooding transmit LLDP PDU for all port The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Transmission Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Holdtime multiplied by Transmission
209. iption e Telnet Service Disable or enable telnet service e Login Authentication List Select login authentication list from this drop down list e Enable Authentication List Select enable authentication list from this drop down list e Session Timeout Set the session timeout value e Password Retry Count Set the password retry count value e Silent Time Set the silent time value Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Disconnect e Click to disconnect telnet communication 230 PLANET Networking amp Communication Telnet Information Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List ES Password Retry Count 3 Current Telnet Sessions Count User s Manual of WGS Managed Series default default Figure 4 9 21 Telnet Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Telnet Service Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time Current Telnet Session Count 4 9 5 2 SSH Description Display the current Telnet service Display the current login authentication list Display the current enable authentication list Display the current session timeout Display the current password retry count Display the current silent time Display the current telnet session count Configure SSH on this Page This Page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no
210. is allowed Buttons Add l S Click to add authentication list IP Source Guard Binding Table Status Figure 4 9 63 IP Source Guard Binding Table Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN e MAC Address Display the current MAC address e IP Address Display the current IP Address e Type Display the current entry type e Lease Time Display the current lease time e Action Click Delete to delete IP source guard binding table status entry 261 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 9 10 Port Security User s Manual of WGS Managed Series This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of four different as described below The Limit Control module is one of the modules that utilize a lower layer module while the Port Security module manages MAC addresses learned on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wid The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4 9 64 amp Figure 4 9 65 appear Port Secu
211. ises network policy configuration information aiding in the discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configuration mismatches on a port Improper network policy configurations frequently result in voice quality degradation or complete service disruption Location This option advertises location identification details Inventory This option advertises device details useful for inventory management such as manufacturer model software version and other pertinent information Select MED network policy from this drop down list 308 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication LLDP MED Port Setting Table User Defined Network Fi aes pees Ges ication Figure 4 12 13 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The switch port number of the logical port e LLDP MED Status Display the current LLDP MED status e Active Display the current active status e Application Display the current application e Location Display the current location e Inventory Display the current inventory The MED Location Configuration and LLDP MED Port Location Table screens in Figure 4 12 14 amp Figure 4 12 15 appear MED Location Configuration Select Ports E ort O 6 160 pairs of hexadecimal characters are Apply Figure 4 12 14 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot 309 User s Manual of WGS Manage
212. ith password admin to login the main screen of Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears A e PLANET B HeImarklg amp Communicailor Username Password LOGIN Figure 4 1 2 Login screen Default User Name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH WGS 4215 8T2S Welcome to PLANET Spanning Tree WGS 4215 8T25S Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Wall mount Managed Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10F Mo 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2719 9528 Email support planet com tw LLDP Diagnostics Copyright 2015 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Maintenance Figure 4 1 3 Default Main Page 47 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Melworking amp Communication Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page lets you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8 0 or above to access Managed Switch gn The changed IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Save button You need to use the new IP address to acce
213. its TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information Destination Source Ethernet Preamble VLAN TAG FCS Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes 115 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type ome Old CRC Original Ethernet Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type EN New CRC New Tagged Packet lE Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contai
214. ive if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 30 to 65535 seconds Sets time to keep silent on supplicant authentication failure Sets the interval for the supplicant to re transmit EAP request identify frame The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled 802 1x Port Status 602 1 Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled E 802 1X Disabled GEB 802 1X Disabled ep Je Disabled GEB Je Disabled ep amp n2 1x Disabled GE10 802 1X Disabled G G G The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Mode pps e Status pps e Periodic Reauthentication om mrwosme Figure 4 9 6 802 1X Port Status Page Screenshot Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current mode Display the current status Display the current periodic reauthentication 218 d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication e Reauthentication Display the current reauthentication period Period e Quiet Period Display the current quiet period e Supplicant Timeout Display the current supplicant timeout e Max EAP Requests Display the current Max EAP requests e Modify Click Edit to edit 802 1X port setting pa
215. ived with invalid CRC The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1518 octets in length Click to clear the RMON statistics 320 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 14 2 RMON Event User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Configure RMON Event table on this page The RMON Event screens in Figure 4 14 2 amp Figure 4 14 3 appear RMON Event RI HMM Description Apply The page includes the following fields U 12 Charactars Figure 4 14 2 RMON Event Configuration Page Screenshot Object e Select Index e Index e Type e Community e Owner e Description Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Description Select index from this drop down list to create new index or modify index Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 Indica
216. k LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Managed Switch B Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status B Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Managed Switch If the Managed Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port B Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the Managed Switch 2 Try another port on the Managed Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while turn on power again 100BASE TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting B Switch does not power up Solution 1 AC power cord is not inserted or faulty 2 Check whether the AC power cord is inserted correctly d Replace the power cord if the cord is inserted correctly Check whether the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 346 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communic
217. l TLV Select Select Ports Select Optional TLVs M Apply Figure 4 12 3 LLDP Port Configuration and Optional TLVs Selection Page Screenshot Object Port Select e State Description Select port from this drop down list Enables LLDP messages transmit and receive modes for LLDP Protocol Data Units Options 298 PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Port Select e Optional TLV Select Buttons Appl SEN Click to apply changes LLDP Port Status User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Tx only Rx only TxRx Disabled Select port from this drop down list Configures the information included in the TLV field of advertised messages System Name When checked the System Name is included in LLDP information transmitted Port Description When checked the Port Description is included in LLDP information transmitted System Description When checked the System Description is included in LLDP information transmitted System Capability When checked the System Capability is included in LLDP information transmitted 802 3 MAC PHY When checked the 802 3 MAC PHY is included in LLDP information transmitted 802 3 Link Aggregation When checked the 802 3 Link Aggregation is included in LLDP information transmitted 802 3 Maximum Frame Size When checked the 802 3 Maximum Frame Size is included in LLDP information transmitted Management Address When checked the Management Address
218. l network or firewall to trusted state Set all other ports outside the local network or firewall to untrusted state The DHCP Snooping Port Setting screen in Figure 4 9 37 amp Figure 4 9 38 appears DHCP Snooping Port Setting 9 Un Trusted O Trusted Enable 9 Disable Apply Figure 4 9 37 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Type Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are B Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message B Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message e Chaddr Check Indicates that the Chaddr check function is enabled on selected port Chaddr Client hardware address Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes 242 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication x DHCP Snooping Port Setting GE E EE Ee Figure 4 9 38 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Type Display the current type e Chaddr Check Display the current chaddr check 243 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 9 7 5 Statistics The DHCP Snooping Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 39 appears DHCP Snooping Statistics Clear
219. l of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication Object Description e Mode Indicates the IP address mode operation Possible modes are Static Enable NTP mode operation When enabling NTP mode operation the agent forwards and transfers NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain DHCP Enable DHCP client mode operation Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup e IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation e Subnet Mask Provide the subnet mask of this switch in dotted decimal notation e Gateway Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation e DNS Server 1 2 Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation Buttons Apply Click to apply changes IP Information DHCP State Disabled Static IP Address Ie lea T Static Subnet Mask Static DNS Server Figure 4 2 3 IP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 55 PLANET Networking amp Communication Object e DHCP State e IP Address e Subnet Mask e Gateway e DNS Server 1 2 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration User s Manual o
220. lay the current registration mode e VLAN Creation Status Display the current VLAN creation status 4 5 12 GVRP VLAN The GVRP VLAN Database screen in Figure 4 5 17 appears GVRP VLAN Database Figure 4 5 17 GVRP VLAN Database Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Member Ports Display the current member ports e Dynamic Ports Display the current dynamic ports e VLAN Type Display the current VLAN type 132 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 5 13 GVRP Statistics The GVRP Port Statistics and Error Statistics screens in Figure 4 5 18 amp Figure 4 5 19 appear GVRP Port Statistics Clear Refresh LAG 070 uu 0 0 07 Figure 4 5 18 GVRP Port Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Join Empty Rx Tx Display the current join empty TX RX packets e Empty Rx Tx Display the current empty TX RX packets e Leave Empty Rx Tx Display the current leave empty TX RX packets e Join In Rx Tx Display the current join in TX RX packets e Leave In Rx Tx Display the current leave in TX RX packets e LeaveAll Rx Tx Display the current leaveall TX RX packets Y GVRP Port Error Statistics Clear Refresh 0 0 OG Figure 4 5 19 GVRP Port Error Statistics Page Scre
221. le This page provides Router Table The Dynamic Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4 7 17 Figure 4 7 18 amp Figure 4 7 19 appear v Dynamic Router Table Figure 4 7 17 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Display the current dynamic router ports e Expiry Time Sec Display the current expiry time Static Router Table Wmm namen Figure 4 7 18 Static Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask 173 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication v Forbbiden Router Table Figure 4 7 19 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask 4 7 2 7 IGMP Forward All This page provides IGMP Forward All The Forward All screen in Figure 4 7 20 appears Forward All VLAN ID o Static o Forbidden 9 None Static Forbidden 9 None Static Forbidden None L Alan ee ee ee Mone LAGE Static Forbidden 9 None L Als Static Forbidden 9 None LAGS Static Forbidden 9 None Apply Figure 4 7 20 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the followi
222. lick to add a new view entry View Table Status m dm deem Figure 4 2 24 SNMP View Table Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 71 e PLANET Networking amp Communication Object e View Name e Subtree OID e OID Mask e View Type e Action 4 2 7 4 SNMP Access Group User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Display the current SNMP view name Display the current SNMP subtree OID Display the current SNMP OID mask Display the current SNMP view type Delete Delete the view table entry Configure SNMPv3 access group on this page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Access Group Setting screens in Figure 4 2 25 amp Figure 4 2 26 appear Access Group Setting Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Nae O Nme o Figure 4 2 25 SNMPv3 Access Group Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Group Name e Security Model e Security Level Description A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are m v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 a v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c Ej V3 Reserved for SNMPv3 or User based Security Model USM Indicates the security model that this entry should belong
223. located at a different port from this packet comes in the Ethernet Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from the address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet then this packet will be filtered thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 5 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer and does the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occur It is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table provided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability However the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves the overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to significantly boost bandwidth using the conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet is stored i
224. low into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions B Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Frame remain untagged Table 4 5 1 Ingress Egress Port with VLAN VID Tag Untag Table B IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks Q in Q tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping
225. lowing fields Object Description e Group ID Display the current group ID e Frame Type Display the current frame type e Protocol Value Display the current protocol value e Delete m Click 1 to delete the group ID entry 127 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 5 9 Protocol VLAN Port Setting This page allows you to map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN port for the switch The Protocol VLAN Port Setting State screens in Figure 4 5 11 amp Figure 4 5 12 appear Protocol VLAN Port Setting Add Figure 4 5 11 Protocol VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list to assign protocol VLAN port e Group Select group ID from this drop down list to protocol VLAN group e VLAN VLAN ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group Buttons Add Click to add protocol VLAN port entry Protocol VLAN Port State Figure 4 5 12 Protocol VLAN Port State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e Group ID Display the current group ID e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Delete Delet Click enpse to delete the group ID entry 128 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 5 10 GVRP Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLA
226. m en EM RE ES xs um UU WE a 802 1Q Trunking VLAN 2 lt EE PC 4 Untagged ss sm em e mm em em mm oco em em mm em mm em em mm eg PC 1 Untagged I l l l l I l l l I I l l l I I l l l l I I l l l l I I I l l l I I I l l l 4 fanen em ms mm e em mm mm em em mm Setup steps Add VLAN group 2 and group 3 VLAN Table VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type 138 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 3 Port 7 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID Port VLAN Status se mw B A SE Tem d Pp VLAN ID 1 Port 1 6 Untagged Port 7 Excluded Port to VLAN Settings VLAN ID 1 e Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged Untagged Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged G GE1 E2 GE4 Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged Ges Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged Untagged ooo ep Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged Untagged ooo O o o Jee hia Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged id VLAN ID 2 Port 1 amp 2 Untagged Port 3 amp 7 Tagged Port 4 6 Excluded 139 PLANET Port to VLAN Settings User s Manual of WGS Managed Series om pena OmmemOteeO nue umagos ER C a ER Jes hy O For
227. maximum of 15 4W for 332 Buttons Apply Networking amp Communication Priority PD Class Current Used mA Power Used W Power Allocation Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PD that supports Class3 level As IEEE 802 3at mode the system is going to reserve 30 8 watts for PD that supports Class4 level From class1 to class3 level in the 802 3at mode it will reserve the same PoE power as in 802 3af mode The Priority represents PoE ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in case the total power consumption is over the total power budget In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turned off and offer power for the port of higher priority Displays the class of the PD attached to the port as established by the classification process Class 0 is the default for PDs The PD is powered based on PoE Class level if the system is working in Classification mode The PD will return to Class 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4 16 1 The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using It can limit the port PoE supply watts Per port maximum value must be less than 30 8 watts Total port values must be less than the Power Reservation value Once power overload is detected the port will auto shut
228. ments such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN The Voice Auto Mode Configuration Network Policy Configuration and LLDP MED Network Policy Table screen in Figure 4 12 10 amp Figure 4 12 11 appears 304 Networking amp
229. mined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed LAG Port Status ES Port Enable Link Flow Ctrl Flow Ctrl me eme foe p penes pines ase o eme m fano forsavos pines ue me e arto penes pines ues fema ome a oiva foisse ue eme em e eser prsnes The page includes the following fields Object e LAG e Description e Port Type e Enable State e Speed Figure 4 4 7 LAG Port Status Page Screenshot Description The LAG for the settings contained in the same row Display the current description Display the current port type Display the current enable state Display the current speed 107 d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication e Duplex Display the current duplex mode e Flow Control Config Display the current flow control configuration e Flow Control Status Display the current flow control status 4 4 4 LACP Setting This page is used to configure the LACP system priority setting The LACP Setting screens in Figure 4 4 8 amp Figure 4 4 9 appear LACP Setting 1 65535 Apply Figure 4 4 8 LACP Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Priority A value which is used to identify the active LACP The Managed Switch with the lowest value has the
230. mited 14300 pps Apply Figure 4 9 42 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e State Set default or user define e Rate Limit pps Configure the rate limit for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 1 to 300 Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes Rae Unit ips Unlimited LAGE Figure 4 9 43 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Rate Limit pps Display the current rate limit 247 p e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 7 8 Option82 Global Setting DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to DHCP servers Known as DHCP Option 82 it allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses or to set other services or policies for clients It is also an effective tool in preventing malicious network attacks from attached clients on DHCP services such as IP Spoofing Client Identifier Spoofing MAC Address Spoofing and Address Exhaustion The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific informa
231. mp Figure 4 8 23 appears Properties QOEnabled Disabled VU Enable sa 9 Disabled 0 65536 min 1440 Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Voice VLAN State Buttons Voice VLAN ID Remark CoS 802 1p 1p remark Aging Time 30 65536 min Apply Click to apply changes Figure 4 8 22 Properties Page Screenshot Description Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible modes are B Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation B Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Select 802 1p value from this drop down list Enable or disable 802 1p remark The time after which a port is removed from the Voice VLAN when VolP traffic is no longer received on the port Default 1440 minutes 207 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication Voice VLAN State Information Name Information Value Voice VLAN State disabled Voice VLAN ID nane disable 1p Remark State disabled Figure 4 8 23 Properties Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Voice VLAN State Dis
232. mple below when the 3 pin terminal block fails to work the hardware failover function will be activated automatically to keep powering the WGS managed series via the DC plug power alternatively without any loss of operation 11 i PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Environment friendly Smart Fan Design for Silent Operation The WGS managed series features a desktop sized metal housing a low noise design and an effective ventilation system It supports the smart fan technology to automatically control the speed of the built in fan to reduce noise and maintain the temperature of the PoE switch for optimal power output capability The WGS managed series is able to operate reliably stably and quietly in any environment without affecting its performance IPv6 IPv4 Dual Stack Supporting both IPv6 and IPv4 protocols the WGS managed series helps the SMBs to step in the IPv6 era with the lowest investment as its network facilities need not to be replaced or overhauled if the IPv6 FTTx edge network is set up Robust Layer 2 Features The WGS managed series can be programmed for advanced switch management functions such as dynamic port link aggregation 802 1Q VLAN and Q in Q VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP Loop and BPDU Guard IGMP Snooping and MLD Snooping Via the link aggregation the WGS managed series allows the operation of a high speed trunk to combine with multiple ports such
233. n 4 9 4 2 Enable List This page is to login list parameters The authentication list screens in Figure 4 9 19 amp Figure 4 9 20 appear New Authentication List Name Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 a ee Add Figure 4 9 19 New Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Defines a name for the authentication list e Method 1 3 Set the login authentication method Empty None Enable TACACS RADIUS Buttons Add l DEMNM Click to add authentication list Enable Authentication Lists a EH Figure 4 9 20 Login Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Display the current list name e Method List Display the current method list e Modify Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 229 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 5 Access This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch including the different access methods Telnet SSH HTTP and HTTPs 4 9 5 1 Telnet The Telnet Settings and Information screen in Figure 4 9 21 amp Figure 4 9 22 appear Telnet Settings 10 0 65535 minutes 3 0 120 Apply Disconnect Figure 4 9 21 Telnet Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Descr
234. n a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduces the overall load on the network The Switch performs Store and forward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate 344 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication No packet loss will occur 5 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Switch have a built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detecting the modes and speeds when both devices are connected Both 10BASE T and 100BASE TX devices can connect with the port in either half or full duplex mode If attached device is 100BASE TX port will set to 10Mbps with auto negotiation 10 20Mbps 10BASE T full duplex 100Mbps without auto negotiation 100Mbps 100Mbps with auto negotiation 100 200Mbps 100BASE TX full duplex 345 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve your issue If the Managed Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Managed Switch is set up according to instructions in this manual B The Lin
235. n on port 249 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication e Allow Untrusted Select modes from this drop down list The following modes are available B Drop B Keep B Replace Buttons Apply Click to apply changes ption82 Port Setting Een disabled Drop Figure 4 9 47 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Enable Display the current status e Allow Untrusted Display the current untrusted mode 250 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 7 10 Option82 Circuit ID Setting Set creation method for option82 users can define the parameters of circuit id suboption by themselves Option82 Circuit ID Setting screens in Figure 4 9 48 amp Figure 4 9 49 appear Option82 Port Circuit ID Settin Vian Circuit ID Apply Figure 4 9 48 Option82 Port Circuit ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e VLAN Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Circuit ID Set the option1 Circuit ID content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets Buttons Apply Click to apply changes ption82 Port Setting Figure 4 9 49 Option82 Port Circuit ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object
236. n the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time 289 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 11 1 Static MAC Setting The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 11 1 amp Figure 4 11 2 appear static MAC Setting MAC Address Add Figure 4 11 1 Statics MAC Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN Select VLAN from this drop down list e Port Select port from this drop down list Buttons Add Click to add new static MAC address Static MAC Status Figure 4 11 2 Statics MAC Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for entries e MAC Address The MA
237. nce access speed and present an easy viewing screen en By default IE8 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to Note explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection making sure the manager PC must be set on the same IP subnet address as the Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via WebUI then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC PC Workstation with Web Browser 192 168 0 x Managed Switch yr one v RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 4 1 1 Web Management B Logging on the switch d Use Internet Explorer 8 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP address is as follows http 192 168 0 100 46 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin w
238. nd attach status Display the current UDP blat status Display the current TCP blat status Display the current POD status Display the current IPv6 min fragment status Display the current ICMP fragment status Display the current IPv4 ping max size status Display the current IPv6 ping max size status Display the current smurf attack status Display the current TCP min header length Display the current TCP syn status Display the current null scan attack status Display the current x mas scan attack status Display the current TCP syn fin attack status Display the current TCP syn rst attack status Display the TCP fragment offset 1 status 266 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 9 11 2 DoS Port Setting The DoS Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 9 68 amp Figure 4 9 69 appear STF Port Setting Por ct I Select Ports Apply Figure 4 9 68 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e DoS Protection Enable or disable per port DoS protection Buttons Apply Click to apply changes DoS Port Status GE4 LAGE Disable Figure 4 9 68 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e DoS Protection Display the current DoS protection
239. ned within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged B Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default 116 d PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication B Assigning Ports to
240. nfiguring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page This page allows you to configure protocol based VLAN Group Setting The protocol based VLAN screens in Figure 4 5 9 amp Figure 4 5 10 appear Add Protocol VLAN Group Bere SE ISS Add Figure 4 5 9 Add Protocol VLAN Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Protocol Group ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values B Ethernet Il B IEEE802 3 LLC Other B RFC 1042 Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Protocol Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected 0x0600 0xFFFE from the preceding Frame Type selection menu 126 PLANET Networking amp Communication Valid values for frame type ranges from 0x0600 Oxfffe Buttons Apply User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Click to apply changes Protocol VLAN Group State Figure 4 5 10 Protocol VLAN Group State Page Screenshot The page includes the fol
241. ng The Global DoS Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 66 amp Figure 4 9 67 appear Global DoS Setting Enabled Disabled byte 0 65585 Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled e 0 65535 Enabled QO Disabled Metmask Length 0 0 82 9Enabled Disabled te O bled Disabled Ena Apply Figure 4 9 66 Global DoS Setting Page Screenshot 264 e PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e DMAC SMAC e Land e UDP Blat e TCP Blat e POD e IPv6 Min Fragment e ICMP Fragments e IPv4 Ping Max Size e Pv6 Ping Max Size e Ping Max Size Setting e Smurf Attack e TCP Min Hdr Size e TCP SYN SPORT 1024 e Null Scan Attack e X mas Scan Attack e TCP SYN FIN Attack e TCP SYN RST Attack e TCP Fragment Offset 1 Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Enable or disable DoS check mode by DMAC SMAC Enable or disable DoS check mode by land Enable or disable DoS check mode by UDP blat Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP blat Enable or disable DoS check mode by POD Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv6 min fragment Enable or disable DoS check mode by ICMP fragment Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv4 ping max size Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv6 ping max size Set the max size for ping Enable or
242. ng ID to 8 level priority queues Port Number 802 1p priority J DSCP IP precedence of IPv4 IPv6 packets Traffic classification based strict priority and WRR Ingress Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control IEEE 802 1X port based authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with RADIUS server RADIUS TACACS authentication IP MAC port binding SE MAC filtering Static MAC address DHCP snooping and DHCP Option82 STP BPDU guard BPDU filtering and BPDU forwarding Spanning Tree Protocol Access Control List 20 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication DoS attack prevention ARP inspection IP source guard Storm control support Broadcast Unknown unicast Unknown multicast Management Functions Web browser Telnet SNMP v1 v2c v3 Firmware upgrade by HTTP TFTP protocol through Ethernet network Configuration upload download through HTTP TFTP Remote Local Syslog Basic Management Interfaces System log LLDP protocol SNTP PLANET Smart Discovery Utility Secure Management Interfaces SSH SSL SNMP v3 RFC 1213 MIB II RFC 1215 Generic Traps RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Bridge MIB Extensions RFC 2737 Entity MIB version 2 RFC 2819 RMON 1 2 3 9 RFC 2863 Interface Group MIB RFC 3635 Ethernet like MIB Standards Conformance Regulatory Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE Stability Testing IEC 60068 2 32 free
243. ng fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list to assign IGMP membership 174 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Wetwarking amp Communication e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Membership Select IGMP membership for each interface Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the IGMP via MVR Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Interface is a member of the IGMP Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 4 7 3 IGMP Snooping Statics This page provides IGMP Snooping Statics The IGMP Snooping Statics screen in Figure 4 7 20 appears IGMP Snooping Statistics Clear Refresh Figure 4 7 20 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot 175 e PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e Total RX e Valid RX e Invalid RX e Other RX e Leave RX e Report RX e General Query RX e Special Group Query RX e Special Group amp Source Query RX e Leave TX e Report TX e General Query TX e Special Group Query TX e Special Group amp Source Query TX Buttons Clear User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Display current total RX Display current valid RX Display current invalid RX Display current other RX Display current leave RX Display current report RX Display current gen
244. nge is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE 2 8 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication matches this source port value B Range If you want to filter a specific source port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific source port range value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 Aframe that hits this ACE matches this source port value e Destination Port Specify the destination port for this ACE B Any No specific destination port is specified destination port status is don t care B Single If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE you can enter a specific destination port value A field for entering a destination port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination port value B Range If you want to filter a specific destination port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific destination port range value A field for entering a destination port value appears e TCP Flags UGR Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE
245. ning the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 215 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 1 2 802 1X Setting This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X authentication system The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for
246. ns the remote id content of option 82 specified by users Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes 248 d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Option Global Setting Information Name Information Value Option82 Remote ID 0 30 4f af fho1 Byte Format Figure 4 9 45 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Option82 Remote ID Display the current option82 remote ID 4 9 7 9 Option82 Port Setting This function is used to set the retransmitting policy of the system for the received DHCP request message which contains option82 B The drop mode means that if the message has option82 then the system will drop it without processing p The keep mode means that the system will keep the original option82 segment in the message and forward it to the server to process u The replace mode means that the system will replace the option 82 segment in the existing message with its own option 82 and forward the message to the server to process Option82 Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 46 amp Figure 4 9 47 appear Option82 Port Setting Enable Allow UnTrusted Select Ports OEnable Disable Apply Figure 4 9 46 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Enable Enable or disable option82 functio
247. nt VLAN ID IGMP Snooping Operation Display the current IGMP snooping operation status Status Router Ports Auto Learn Display the current router ports auto learning Query Robustness Display the current query robustness Query Interval sec Display the current query interval Query Max Response Display the current query max response interval Interval sec Last Member Query count Display the current last member query count 168 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication e Last Member Query Display the current last member query interval Interval sec e Immediate Leave Display the current immediate leave e Modify Click Edit to edit parameter 4 7 2 2 IGMP Querier Setting This page provides IGMP Querier Setting The IGMP Querier Setting screens in Figure 4 7 10 amp Figure 4 7 11 appear IGMP Querier Setting Select VLANs 9nisable OEnable v2 Liv Apply Figure 4 7 10 IGMP VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list e Querier State Enable or disable the querier state The default value is Disabled e Querier Version Sets the querier version for compatibility with other devices on the network Version 2 or 3 Default 2 Buttons Apply Click to apply changes IGMP Querier Status Figure 4 7 11 IGMP Querier Status Page Screenshot 169 e PL
248. nter a specific source port value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE 284 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication matches this source port value B Range If you want to filter a specific source port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific source port range value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 Aframe that hits this ACE matches this source port value e Destination Port Specify the destination port for this ACE B Any No specific destination port is specified destination port status is don t care B Single If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE you can enter a specific destination port value A field for entering a destination port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination port value B Range If you want to filter a specific destination port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific destination port range value A field for entering a destination port value appears e TCP Flags UGR Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allow
249. ny OUI Port Setting The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI The Telephony OUI MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 8 26 amp Figure 4 8 27 appear Voice VLAN Port Setting Select Ports OEnabled Disabled Cal Sre Apply Figure 4 8 26 Voice VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e State Enable or disable the voice VLAN port setting The default value is Disabled e CoS Mode Select the current CoS mode Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Voice VLAN Port State wm am en L Alb oft Figure 4 8 27 Voice VLAN Port State Page Screenshot 210 d PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e State Display the current state e CoS Mode Display the current CoS mode 211 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 Security This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch inclu
250. o requests to send e Interval in sec Send interval for each ICMP packet e Size in bytes The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes e Ping Results Display the current ping result Buttons Apply Click to transmit ICMP packets 316 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you have to set up Note the correct gateway IP address 4 13 4 IPv6 Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Apply 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4 13 4 appears Ping test Setting IPv6 MEM Address L n A AA AA Count 1 5 Default 4 Interval in sec 1 3 Default 1 j Size in bytes 8 5120 Default 56 Ping Results Apply Figure 4 13 4 ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e P Address The destination IPv6 Address e Count Number of echo requests to send e Interval in sec Send interval for each ICMP packet e Size in bytes The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes e Ping Results Displa
251. oS mapping The page includes the following fields User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Figure 4 8 7 CoS Mapping Page Screenshot Display the current CoS value e CoS e Mapping to Queue e Queue e Mapping to CoS Display the current mapping to queue Display the current queue value Display the current mapping to CoS 197 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 8 2 5 DSCP Mapping The DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 8 amp Figure 4 8 9 appear DSCP to Queue Mapping Select DSCP sl Queue to DSCP Mapping o me Soe eil 32 Figure 4 8 8 DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue Select Queue value from this drop down list e DSCP Select DSCP value from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series DSCP mapping Mapping to Queue 198 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series pu I paom A Q Figure 4 8 9 DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DSCP Display the current CoS value e Mapping to Queue Display the current mapping to queue e Queue Display the current queue value e Mapping to DSCP Display the current mapping to DSCP 4 8 2 6 IP Precedence Mapping The IP Precedence to Queue and Qu
252. of WGS Managed Series e Tx Hold Count The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second e Hello Time The time that controls the switch to send out the BPDU packet to check STP current status Enter a value between 1 through 10 Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes CIST Instance Information Information Name Information Value Priority 42768 Wedge Told cow MN Figure 4 6 9 CIST Instance Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Priority Display the current CIST priority e Max Hop Display the current Max hop e Forward Delay Display the current forward delay e Max Age Display the current Max Age e Tx Hold Count Display the current Tx hold count e Hello Time Display the current hello time 154 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 6 5 CIST Port Setting This page allows you to configure per port CIST priority and cost The CIST Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 6 10 amp Figure 4 6 11 appear CIST Port Setting Port Select lage B Apply Figure 4 6 10 CIST Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control
253. omatically Reboot Automatically Reboot Every Monday 03 00 Every Friday 23 00 GENER 5 amp MTWTFS OFF PoE PoE C gt gt gt gt gt ON ON OFF ON OFF Allows scheduled power recycling 334 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series L PLANET Networking amp Communication The screen in Figure 4 16 4 appears PoE Schedule Start Ste D E E oot Keboot Reboot Reboot Hour Min Hour Min Enable Only Hour M PoE Schedule Sta PoE Reboot Fri Thu Wed Tue Mon sur h 1h 2h 3h 4h Sh 6h 0 7h 0h 8h 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 18h 20n 21h 22h 23h 00h Figure 4 16 4 PoE Schedule Screenshot Please press Add New Rule button to start setting PoE Schedule function You have to set PoE schedule to profile and then go back to PoE Port Configuration and select Schedule mode from per port PoE Mode option to enable you to indicate which schedule profile could be applied to the PoE port The page includes the following fields Object Description e Profile Set the schedule profile mode Possible profiles are Profile1 Profile2 Profile3 Profile4 e Week Day Allows user to set week day for defining PoE function by enabling it on the day e Start Hour Allows user to set what hour PoE function does by enabling it 335 e PLANET Networking amp Communication e Start Min e End Hour e End Min e Reboot Enable e R
254. on t care e Type of Service Specify the type of service for this ACE B Any No specific type of service is specified destination port status is don t care B DSCP If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE you can enter a specific DSCP value A field for entering a DSCP value appears The allowed range is 0 to 63 A frame that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value B IP Precedence If you want to filter a specific IP precedence with this ACE you can enter a specific IP precedence value A field for entering an IP precedence value appears The allowed range is 0 to 7 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP precedence value e ICMP Specify the ICMP for this ACE B Any No specific ICMP is specified destination port status is don t care B List If you want to filter a specific list with this ACE you can select a specific list value B Protocol ID If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE you can enter a specific protocol ID value A field for entering a protocol ID value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this protocol ID value e ICMP Code Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE B Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care B User Defined If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears The allowed range is
255. ontrol Settings r ort FA di I Select Ports pisable O Enable sdf 1000000 musta multiple of 16 Apply Figure 4 8 16 Ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled e Rate Kbps Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Ingress Bandwidth Control Status Ingress RateLimit Kbps Figure 4 8 17 Ingress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot 203 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Ingress Rate Limit Kbps Display the current ingress rate limit 4 8 4 2 Egress Bandwidth Control This page provides to select the egress bandwidth preamble The Egress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 18 amp Figure 4 8 19 appear Egress Bandwidth Control Settings Rate Kbps Select Ports pisable O Enable 000 0 1000000 must a multiple of 1B Apply Figure 4 8 18 Egress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this
256. or conditions for local log warning Warning level of the warning conditions for local log notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log info Informational level of the informational messages for local log debug Debug level of the debugging messages for local log 64 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes Local Logging Setting Status Status Severity Action buffered emerg alert crit error warning notice Figure 4 2 15 Local Log Setting Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Status Display the current local log state e Target Display the current local log target e Severity Display the current local log severity e Action Delete Delete the current status 4 2 6 3 Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page The Remote Syslog page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages below a l PO IP 192 168 0 100 specified level Event Log Syslog Server IP 192 168 0 200 Port 514 65 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The Remote Syslog screens in Figure 4 2 16 amp Figure 4 2 17 appear Remote Logging Setting Server Address Server Port
257. ority Buttons Add User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Set the server definition Address of the TACACS server IP name Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 The key shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the server before it resends the request Set the server priority Click to add Radius server setting TACACS Servers Figure 4 9 15 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e IP Address e Port e Key e Timeout e Retries e Priority e Modify Description Display the current IP address Display the current port Display the current key Display the current timeout Display the current retry times Display the current priority E dit Click to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 226 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 4 AAA Authentication authorization and accounting AAA provides a framework for configuring access control on the Managed Switch The three security functions can be summarized as follows e Authentication Identifies users that request access to the network e Authorization Determines if users can access specific services e Accounting
258. ort by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized 214 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication
259. ort error disabled function to check status by DHCP rate limit Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ARP rate limit 93 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Apply Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Error Disable Information Information Name Information Value ARP rate limit The page includes the following fields disabled Figure 4 3 14 Error Disabled Information Page Screenshot Object Recovery Interval BPDU Guard Self Loop Broadcast Flood Unknown Multicast Flood Unicast Flood ACL Port Security Violation DHCP Rate Limit ARP Rate Limit Description Display the current recovery interval time Display the current BPDU guard status Display the current self loop status Display the current broadcast flood status Display the current unknown multicast flood status Display the current unicast flood status Display the current ACL status Display the current port security violation status Display the current DHCP rate limit status Display the current ARP rate limit status 94 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 3 7 Port Error Disabled This page provides disable that transitions a port into error disable and the recovery options The ports were disabled by some protocols such as BPDU Guard Loopback and UDLD The Port Error Disable screen in Figure 4 3 15 appear
260. orts the following Aggregation links E Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group E Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Link Aggregation ES EE a Link Aggregation 4 Port Link Aggregation Up to 4 Gbps 4 Figure 4 4 1 Link Aggregation 102 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode For more detailed information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 8 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link Aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port
261. otocol IEEE 802 1s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions E Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements u Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups E Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate
262. ould belong to Possible Protocol authentication protocols are E None None authentication protocol 19 Buttons Add e PLANET Networking amp Communication Authentication Password Encryption Protocol Encryption Key User s Manual of WGS Managed Series a MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol H SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For both MD5 and SHA authentication protocols the allowed string length is 8 to 16 Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are i None None privacy protocol Si DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 16 Click to add a new user entry User Status UserName pang Privilege Mode Authentication Protocol Encryption Protocol Access Right Action The page includes the following fields Figure 4 2 30 SNMPv3 Users Status Page Screenshot Object User Name Group Privilege Mode Authentication Protocol Encryption Protocol Access Right Action Description Display the current user name Display the current grou
263. out for Reply 3 Key String Apply The page includes the following fields versian 6 Version 4 Range 1 10 Default 3 sec Range 1 30 Default 3 min Range 0 2000 Default 0 0 53 ASCI Alphanumeric Characters Used Figure 4 9 10 Use Default Parameters Page Screenshot Object Buttons Apply Retries Timeout for Reply Dead Time Key String Click to apply changes Description Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 10 to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request Retransmit is the number of times in the range 1 to 30 a RADIUS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than O zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured The secret key up to 63 characters long shared between the RADIUS server and the switch 222 PLANET Networking amp Communication New Radius Server Add User s Manual of WGS Managed Series By IP address
264. p Display the current privilege mode Display the current authentication protocol Display the current encryption protocol Display the current access right EON Delete the user entry User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 2 7 7 SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients Configure SNMPv1 and 2 notification recipients on this page The SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4 2 31 amp Figure 4 2 32 appear SNMPv1 2 Host Setting Server Address SNMP Version Notify Type ae Name UDP Port Timeout Retries TESCH Add Figure 4 2 31 SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e SNMP Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are B SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 B SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c e Notify Type Set the notify type in traps or informs e Community Name Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet e UDP Port Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port the port range is 1 655395 e Time Out Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 1 to 300 e Retries In
265. play the current port mask Forbbiden Router Table Figure 4 7 31 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot 182 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask 4 7 4 6 MLD Forward All This page provides MLD Forward All The Forward All screen in Figure 4 7 32 appears Forward All vanno H em woma Ge ee GE Static Forbidden 9 None LAGE X era eee ee ne LAG Static Forbidden 9 None LAGE Static Forbidden None Apply Figure 4 7 32 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list to assign MLD membership e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Membership Select MLD membership for each interface Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the MLD via MVR Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Interface is a member of the MLD 183 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes 4 7 5 MLD Snooping Statics This page provides MLD Snooping Statics The MLD Snooping Statics screen in Figure 4 7 33 appears
266. play the current voice VLAN state e Voice VLAN ID Display the current voice VLAN ID e Remark CoS 802 1p Display the current remark CoS 802 1p e 1premark Display the current 1p remark e Aging Display the current aging time 4 8 5 3 Telephony OUI MAC Setting Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this Page The Telephony OUI MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 8 24 amp Figure 4 8 25 appear Voice VLAN OUI Setting Add Figure 4 8 24 Voice VLAN OUI Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 208 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication Object Description e OUI Address A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description User defined text that identifies the VoIP devices Buttons Add i Click to add voice VLAN OUI setting Voice VLAN OUI Group 00 E0 BEB 3C Oh Edit Delete Figure 4 8 25 Voice VLAN OUI Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e OUI Address Display the current OUI address e Description Display the current description e Modify Click Edit to edit voice VLAN OUI group parameter Click Delete to delete voice VLAN OUI group parameter 209 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 8 5 4 Telepho
267. ply Figure 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Status 328 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 15 1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device Voice over IP phones Enterprise can install POE VoIP Phone ATA and other Ethernet non Ethernet end devices in the central area where UPS is 3 5 watts installed for un interruptible power system and power control system Wireless LAN Access Points Museums sightseeing spots airports hotels campuses factories and warehouses can install the Access Point anywhere 6 12 watts IP Surveillance Enterprises museums campuses hospitals and banks can install IP v camera without the limit of the installation location Electrician is not needed 10 12 watts to install AC sockets PoE Splitter f PoE Splitter splits the PoE 56V DC over the Ethernet cable into 5 12V DC power output It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power 3 12 watts outlet locations which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time High Power PoE Splitter High PoE Splitter splits the PoE 56V DC over the Ethernet cable into 24 12V DC power output It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations which eliminate the costs for additional AC 3 25 watts wiring and reduces the installation time High Power Speed Dome This state of the art design is considerable to fit in various network en
268. port e Type Display the current port type e Src Mac Chk Display the current Src Mac Chk status e Dst Mac Chk Display the current Dst Mac Chk status e IP Chk Display the current IP Chk status e IP Allow Zero Display the current IP allow zero status 255 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 9 8 4 Statistics Configures switch ports as DAI trusted or untrusted and check mode DAI Port Setting screen in Figure 4 9 56 appears Dynamic ARP Inspection Statistics Clear Refresh Port Forwarded Source MAC Failures Dest MAC Failures SIP Validation Failures DIP Validation Failures IP MAC Mismatch Failures Figure 4 9 56 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Forwarded Display the current forwarded Source MAC Failures Display the current source MAC failures e Dest MAC Failures Display the current source MAC failures e SIP Validation Failures Display the current SIP Validation failures e DIP Validation Failures Display the current DIP Validation failures e IP MAC Mismatch Display the current IP MAC mismatch failures Failures Buttons Clear l Click to clear the statistics Refresh Click to refresh the statistics 256 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 9 8 5 Rate Limit The ARP Rate Limit Se
269. priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e Internal Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port SRI The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes 155 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series CIST Port Status Indentifier External External Priority Path Cost Path Cost Mun dee EE eil DANI NAME uiid Mida re Port State PortID Conf Oper Conf Oper 2 Cost d p GE1 128 1 0720000 n 20000 0 of 20000 No N Auto No Disabed Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 GEMA E EE GE2 128 2 n 20000 o 20000 OF 0 20000 No No lAuto No Disabed Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 GE3 128 3 0720000 os20000 id 0 20000 No No Auto No Disabed Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ae D j 07 0 3 e 198 4 720000 0 20000 D0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 nn nn oe 0 9 el EI T No No Auto No Disabed Disabled D U U
270. r s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 2 7 5 SNMP Community Configure SNMP Community on this page The SNMP Community screens in Figure 4 2 27 amp Figure 4 2 28 appear Community Setting Figure 4 2 27 Community Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Community Name Indicates the community read write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 16 Community Mode Indicates the SNMP community supported mode Possible versions are B Basic Set SNMP community mode supported version 1 and 2c B Advanced Set SNMP community mode supported version 3 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 Access Right Indicates the SNMP community type operation Possible types are RO Read Only Set access string type in read only mode RW Read Write Set access string type in read write mode Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes PS Ree ssl Figure 4 2 28 Community Status Page Screenshot d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Description e Community Name Display the current community type e Group Name Display the curren
271. r contains configuration settings The screen in Figure 4 1 7 appears save Configuration Source File Destination File Running configuration O Startup configuration O Backup configuration 9 Startup configuratian Backup configuration Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Running Configuration e Startup Configuration Figure 4 1 7 Save Button Screenshot Description Refers to the running configuration sequence use in the switch In switch the running configuration file stores in the RAM In the current version the running configuration sequence running config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by saving Source File Running Configuration to Destination File Startup Configuration so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup configuration file which is called configuration save To prevent illicit file upload and easier configuration switch mandates the name of running configuration file to be running config Refers to the configuration sequence used in switch startup Startup configuration file stores in nonvolatile storage corresponding to the so called configuration save If the device supports multi config file name the configuration file to be cfg file the default is startup cfg If the device does not support multi config file mandates the name of startup 51 Lo PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Mana
272. r each LAG The LAG Port Setting screens in Figure 4 4 6 amp Figure 4 4 7 appear Enabled Flow Contro LAG Port settings Enabled ODisabled O Enabled Disabled Figure 4 4 6 LAG Port Setting Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG Select Select LAG number from this drop down list e Enable Indicates the LAG state operation Possible states are Enabled Start up the LAG manually Disabled Shut down the LAG manually e Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode B Auto Set up Auto negotiation B Auto 10M Set up 10M Auto negotiation 106 PLANET Wetworking amp Communication e Flow Control Buttons Apply Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Auto 100M Set up 100M Auto negotiation Auto 1000M Set up 1000M Auto negotiation Auto 10 100M Set up 10 100M Auto negotiation 10M Set up 10M Force mode 100M Set up 100M Force mode B 1000M Set up 1000M Force mode When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed The current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are deter
273. rameter 4 9 1 4 Guest VLAN Setting Overview When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meantime the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if
274. rent login authentication list e Session Timeout Display the current session timeout 4 9 6 Management Access Method 4 9 6 1 Profile Rules The Profile Rule Table Setting and Table screens in Figure 4 9 29 amp Figure 4 9 30 appear Profile Rule Table Setting G AI O IPv4 Mask 0 0 00 0 000 Select Ports v IPv6 P refix 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 9 29 Profile Rule Table Setting Page Screenshot Apply The page includes the following fields Object Description e Access Profile Name Indicates the access profile name 1 32 characters e Priority 1 65535 Set priority The allowed value is from 1 to 65535 235 Buttons Apply e PLANET Networking amp Communication Management Method Action Port IP Source Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPs telnet SSH SNMP AII interface that the host IP address matched the entry An IP address can contain any combination of permit or deny rules Default Permit rules Sets the access mode of the profile either permit or deny Select port from this drop down list Indicates the IP address for the access management entry Profile Rule Table Access Profile Name Priority Management Method Action Port Source IPV4 Source IPV4 Mask Source IPV6 Source IPVG Prefix Modify The page includes the following fields Object
275. ria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN m ifa DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN e f the DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table B Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped 4 9 7 2 Global Setting DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of switch when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this page The DHCP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 33 amp Figure 4 9 34 appear DHCP Snooping Setting Apply Figure 4 9 33 DHCP Snooping Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 239 d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Object Description e DHCP Snooping Indicate
276. ription e History Index Select history index from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 327 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 15 Power over Ethernet The WGS PoE Managed Switch Series can easily build a power central controlled IP phone system IP camera system and AP group for the enterprise For instance cameras APs can be easily installed around the corner in the company for surveillance demands or build a wireless roaming environment in the office Without the power socket limitation the WGS PoE Managed Switch Series makes the installation of cameras or WLAN APs easier and more efficient PoE Power Budget list for WGS PoE Managed switch series Model Name PoE Budget WGS 804HPT 144 watts PLANET Hetworking amp Communication SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH WGS 804HPT System d PoE Configuration Port Management i PoE Configuration Link Aggregation lt P z 4 Spanning Tree Multicast SS Temperature Threshold Degrees C PoE Temperature 111 C 231 F Power Budget wW Power Allocation 89 129 W 144 W Current Power Power PoE Mode Schedule Used Used Allocation mA W W s eme s s lees el ws Qos Az Security Access Control List MAC Address Table kv LLDP d Diagnostics RMON PoE PoE Configuration PoE Schedule PD Alive Check Maintenance 36 Ap
277. rity TUE NETT TEES PortSelect Select Apply Figure 4 9 64 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Security e Mac L2 Entry e Action Description Select port from this drop down list Enable or disable the port security The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions B Forward Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action B Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected 262 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Wetworking amp Communication and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 2 Cli
278. rnet Explorer 8 0 or later Google Chrome Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later e PLANET SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH WGS 4215 8T2S Welcome to PLANET WGS 4215 8T25 Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Wall mount Managed Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10F Mo 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2719 90528 Email support planet com tw Copyright 2015 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 3 1 4 Web Main Screen of Managed Switch 43 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 3 4 SNMP based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Network management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public li a PC Workstation with Managed Switch SNMP application SNMP Agent Status
279. rrent username e Password Type Display the current password type e Privilege Type Display the current privilege type e Modify Click to modify the local user entry Delete Delete the current user 4 2 5 Time Settings 4 2 5 1 System Time Configure SNTP on this page SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems You can specify SNTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The SNTP Configuration screens in Figure 4 2 8 amp Figure 4 2 9 appear System Time Setting Enable SNTP 9nDisable Enable Year Month Ja el D n w Hours O sei Minutes ER Les MjDay Hours o M ES Daylight Saving Time Daylight Saving Time Offset ao ss 1 1440 Minutes Day Sun v Week 1 v Month Jan Hours o Minutes 0 Day Week Month ks Haurs Minutes Non recurring From ear Month an Date Hours o Minutes o vear Jon 7 Month an Date Haurs Mmes Apply Figure 4 2 8 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Enable SNTP Enabled Enable SNTP mode operation When enabling SNTP mode operation the agent forwards and transfers SNTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Disabled Disable SNTP mode operation 59 Buttons Apply Networking amp Communication Manual Time Time Zone Daylight Saving Time
280. rt receives LACP PDU from link partner e AtKey Port key of actor The key is designed to be the same as trunk ID e Sel LACP selection logic status of the port B S means selected B U means unselected B D means standby e Mux LACP mux state machine status of the port B DETACH means the port is in detached state B WAIT means waiting state B ATTACH means attach state B CLLCT means collecting state B DSTRBT means distributing state e Receiv LACP receive state machine status of the port B INIT means the port is in initialize state PORTds means port disabled state EXPR means expired state LACPds means LACP disabled state DFLT means defaulted state B CRRNT means current state e PrdTx LACP periodic transmission state machine status of the port B no PRD means the port is in no periodic state B FstPRD means fast periodic state B SIwPRD means slow periodic state B PrdTX means periodic TX state e AtState The actor state field of LACP PDU description The field from left to right describes LACP Activity LACP_ Timeout Aggregation Synchronization Collecting Distributing Defaulted and Expired The contents could be true or false If the contents are false the web shows if the contents are true the web shows A T G S C D F and E for each content respectively e PnState The partner stat
281. rther ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states E Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization switch boot to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled 142 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication H From disabled to blocking Switch Blocking Listening Disable Learning Forwarding Figure 4 6 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP
282. rts in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN B Isolated Protected ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN The port settings relate to the currently unit as reflected by the page header The Port Isolation Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 16 amp Figure 4 3 17 appear 96 PLANET E ww User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Protected Ports Settings Port List Port Type select Protected Pore 9 Unprotected Protected Apply Figure 4 3 16 Protected Ports Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port List Select port number from this drop down list e Port Type Displays protected port types Protected A single stand alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated or host ports This VLAN conveys traffic
283. s Port Error Disabled Status Error Disabled Reason Time Left Seconds Figure 4 3 15 Port Error Disable Page Screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Port Name Display the port for error disable e Error Disable Reason Display the error disabled reason of the port e Time Left Seconds Display the time left 4 3 8 Protected Ports Overview When a switch port is configured to be a member of protected group also called Private VLAN communication between protected ports within that group can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the protected group but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication I utet Promiscuous Public Servers Promiscuous Isolate e Access Denied Access Denied Access Denied Private VLAN For protected port group to be applied the Managed switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation Ports in a protected port group fall into one of these two groups Promiscuous Unprotected ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all po
284. s Disconnect Click to disconnect telnet communication SSH Information Information Name Vaile formation SSH Service Disabled Password Retry Count Current SSH Sessions Count Figure 4 9 24 SSH Information Page Screenshot 232 Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e SSH Service e Login Authentication List e Enable Authentication List e Session Timeout e Password Retry Count e Silent Time e Current SSH Session Count 4 9 5 3 HTTP User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Display the current SSH service Display the current login authentication list Display the current enable authentication list Display the current session timeout Display the current password retry count Display the current silent time Display the current SSH session count The HTTP Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 25 amp Figure 4 9 26 appear HTTP Settings HTTP Service Enabled Disabled Login Authentication List default Apply Figure 4 9 25 HTTP Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e HTTP Service e Login Authentication List e Session Timeout Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes Description Disable or enable HTTP service Select login authentication list from this drop down list Set the session timeout value 233 e PLANET Networking amp Communication H
285. s Object Description e Enable Enable or disable the STP function The default value is Disabled e BPDU Forward Set the BPDU forward method e PathCost Method The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media e Force Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP Compatible 148 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Configuration Name e Configuration Revision Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes User s Manual of WGS Managed Series RSTP Operation and MSTP Operation Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used The values allowed are between 0 and 65535 The default value is 0 STP Informations STP BPDU Forward flooding Cost Method Force Version Configuration Name Configuration Revision The page includes the following fields Object e STP e BPDU Forward e Cost Method e Force Version e Configuration Name e Configuration Revision ROTP Operation BIEE Or rar ll Figure 4 6 5 STP Information Page Screenshot Description Display the current STP state Display the current BPDU forward mode Display the current cost method Display the current force version Display the current configuration name Display the c
286. s The ports are shut down when total reserved power exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver 330 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication In this mode the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more available power 4 15 3 Power over Ethernet Configuration This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE configuration setting as screen in Figure 4 16 1 appears PoE Configuration Figure 4 16 1 PoE Configuration Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System PoE Admin Allows user to enable or disable PoE function It will cause all of PoE ports to Mode supply or not to supply power e PoE Management There are six modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and Mode when to shut down ports B Classification mode The system reserves PoE power to PD according to PoE class level B Consumption mode The system offers PoE power according to PD real power consumption B Allocation mode Users allow to assign how much PoE power to each port and the system will reserve PoE power to PD e Temperature Allows setting over temperature protection threshold value If the system Threshold temperature is overly high the system will lower the total POE power budget automatically e PoE Temperature Display the PoE Chip Temperature e Power Budget Allows user to configure PoE power budget
287. s ID management IP address and port information The Local Device Summary and Port Status screens in Figure 4 12 7 amp Figure 4 12 8 appear Local Device Summary Figure 4 12 7 Local Device Summary Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Chassis ID Subtype Display the current chassis ID subtype e Chassis ID Display the current chassis ID e System Name Display the current system name e System Description Display the current system description e Capabilities Supported Display the current capabilities supported e Capabilities Enabled Display the current capabilities enabled e Port ID Subtype Display the current port ID subtype 301 e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Detail o jo nm Tage D jes Jup een C eeneg kEseer e E ewe o Ea O E o e em o em o SSS o fe wm fem ooo o e em emm o O O o fe nem dem OIO O Ji Figure 4 12 8 Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The switch port number of the logical port e LLDP Status Display the current LLDP status e LLDP MED Status Display the current LLDP MED Status 302 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 12 5 LLDP Remove Device This page provides a status overview for all LLDP remove devices The displayed
288. s the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are B Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports B Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes DHCP Snooping Informations DHCP Snooping disabled Figure 4 9 34 DHCP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DHCP Snooping Display the current DHCP snooping status 4 9 7 3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Command Usage m When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch and enabled on the specified VLAN DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN m When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled DHCP snooping can still be configured for specific VLANs but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re enabled m When DHCP snooping is globally enabled and DHCP snooping is then disabled on a VLAN all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table The DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4 9 35 amp Figure 4 9 36 appear 240 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Apply Figure 4 9 35 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page
289. screen in Figure 4 7 26 appears MLD Group Table Figure 4 7 26 MLD Group Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VID e Group IP Address Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service e Member Port Display the current member port e Type Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic depending on selected options e Life Sec Display the current life 4 7 4 4 MLD Router Setting Depending on your network connections MLD snooping may not always be able to locate the MLD querier Therefore if the MLD querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your Managed Switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the Managed Switch The MLD Router Setting screens in Figure 4 7 27 amp Figure 4 7 28 appear Add Router Port VLAN ID Static Ports Select Forbid Ports Select Add Figure 4 7 27 Add Router Port Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached 180 d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication multicast router e Type
290. sed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent e Bo LLL DER B S e Wate Colson Frames SSS EE ER ecan OOOO NEN STEE EE ER DS ER EE ER SC RN Object Alignment Errors FCS Errors Single Collision Frames Multiple Collision Frames Deferred Transmissions Late Collision Excessive Collision Figure 4 3 5 Ethernet link Counters Page Screenshot Description The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increase when the interface is 86 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication operating in full duplex mode e Fram
291. snooping database agent If the agent is disabled dynamic ARP or IP source guard is enabled and the DHCP snooping binding database has dynamic bindings the switch loses its connectivity If the agent is disabled and only DHCP snooping is enabled the switch does not lose its connectivity but DHCP snooping might not prevent DCHP spoofing attacks The database agent stores the bindings in a file at a configured location When reloading the switch reads the binding file to build the DHCP snooping binding database The switch keeps the file current by updating it when the database changes When a switch learns of new bindings or when it loses bindings the switch immediately updates the entries in the database The switch also updates the entries in the binding file The frequency at which the file is updated is based on a configurable delay and the updates are batched If the file is not updated in a specified time set by the write delay and abort timeout values the update stops The DHCP Snooping Database and Information screens in Figure 4 9 40 amp Figure 4 9 41 appear DHCP Snooping Database Database Type FileName Remote Server AX X X nr Hostname Write Delay 15 66400 sceond Timeout 0 86400 second Apply Figure 4 9 40 DHCP Snooping Database Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Database Type Select database type e File Name The name of file image 245
292. splay the current IPv6 multicast forward method 4 7 2 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network 163 PLANET H User s Manual of W
293. ss the Web interface For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup a a Only accept command in lowercase letter under Web interface 48 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Melworking amp Communication 4 1 Main Web Page The Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Main Screen SFP Port Link Status Main Functions Menu Copper Port Link Status D PLANET LERRA ES H 10 SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH WGS 4215 8T25 Welcome to PLANET WGS 4215 8T25S Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Wall mount Managed Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 22719 95278 Email support planet com tw o Copyright 2015 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Maintenance Figure 4 1 4 Main Page Panel Display The Web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows
294. t WGS 4215 8T Power Green 10 100 1000T RJ45 Interfaces Port 1 to Port 8 1000 LNK ACT Green 10 100 LNK ACT Orange LED WGS 4215 8T2S Power Green 10 100 1000T RJ45 Interfaces Port 1 to Port 8 1000 LNK ACT Green 10 100 LNK ACT Orange 100 1000Mbps SFP Interfaces Port 9 to Port 10 1000 LNK ACT Green 100 LNK ACT Orange Dimensions W x D x H 148 x 25 x 134 mm 178 x 25 x 134 mm Weight mm eg 12V 48V DC 1A 12V 48V DC 1A 24V AC 1A 24V AC 1A ESD Protection 6KV DC 22 Power Requirements PLANET we User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Power Consumption 10 watts max 7 9 watts max Dissipation 34 BTU 26 BTU Co Layer 2 Functions TX RX both Many to 1 monitor 802 1Q tagged based VLAN Up to 256 VLAN groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs 802 1ad Q in Q tunneling Voice VLAN Protocol VLAN Private VLAN Protected port GVRP Port Mirroring IEEE 802 3ad LACP and static trunk Supports 4 groups of 8 port trunk Spanning Tree Protocol STP RSTP MSTP Link Aggregation IGMP v2 v3 Snooping IGMP Snooping IGMP Querier Up to 256 multicast groups MLD Snooping MLD v1 v2 Snooping up to 256 multicast groups Access Control List IPvA IPv6 IP based ACL MAC based ACL 8 mapping ID to 8 level priority queues Port number 802 1p priority 802 1Q VLAN tag DSCP field in IP packet Traffic classification b
295. t SNMP access group s name e View Name Display the current view name e Access Right Display the current access type e Delete Delete Delete the community entry 4 2 7 6 SNMP User Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view The entry index key is User Name The SNMPv3 User Setting screens in Figure 4 2 29 amp Figure 4 2 30 appear User Setting Privilege Authentication RS Encryption v noauth v 16 8 16 chars chars Add Figure 4 2 29 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Group The SNMP Access Group A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to e Privilege Mode Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are m NoAuth None authentication and none privacy B Auth Authentication and none privacy m Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry sh
296. t is considered to be dead Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 10 to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request 223 e PLANET Networking amp Communication e Server Priority e Dead Time e Usage Type Buttons Add User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Set the server priority The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than O zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured Set the usage type The following modes are available B Login B 802 1X B All Click to add Radius server setting Login Authentication Lists The page includes the following fields Object e IP Address e Auth Port e Acct Port e Key e Timeout e Retries e Priority e Dead Time e Usage Type e Modify Figure 4 9 12 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot Description Display the current IP address Display the current auth port Display the current acct port Display the current key Display the current timeout Display the current retry times Display the current priority Display the current dead time Display the current usage t
297. tal number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets B MulticastPkts The total number of good frames received that were directed 323 JP PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication to this multicast address B CRCAlignErrors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors B UnderSizePkts The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed B OverSizePkts The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed B Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error B Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error B Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment B Pkts64Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets B Pkts64to172Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmit
298. ted where the number of octets falls within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets B Pkts158to255Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets B Pkts256to511Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets B Pkts512to1023Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets B Pkts1024to1518Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets e Sample Interval Sample interval 12147483647 e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are B Absolute Get the sample directly default 324 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Rising Threshold e Falling Threshold e Rising Event e Falling Event e Owner Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes Index Sample Port Sample Variable Sample Interval Sample Type Rising T
299. tes the notification of the event the possible types are B none The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters log The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol SNMP Trap The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol B Log and Trap The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal Specify the community when trap is sent the string length is from 0 to 127 default is public Indicates the owner of this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string Indicates description of this event the string length is from O to 127 default is a null string 321 PLANET Networking amp Communication RMON Event User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Figure 4 14 3 RMON Event Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Index Display the current event index e Event Type Display the current event type e Community Display the current community for SNMP trap e Description Display the current event description e Last Sent Time Display the current last sent time e Owner Display the current event owner e Action Click Delete to delete RMON event entry 4 14 3 RMON Event Log This page provides an overview of RMON Event Log The RMON Event Log Table screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears RMON Event Log Table Event Index Wie rie omspbm O
300. th Scheduling Method Strict Priority Weight of WRR Bandwidth Figure 4 8 4 Queue Table Page Screenshot Description Display the current queue ID Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority on this switch port Controls whether the scheduler mode is Weighted on this switch port Controls the weight for this queue This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Display the current bandwidth for each queue 195 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Wetworking amp Communication Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Information Name Information Value strict Priority Queue Number Figure 4 8 5 Queue Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Information Name Display the current queue method information e Information Value Display the current queue value information 4 8 2 4 CoS Mapping The CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 6 amp Figure 4 8 7 appear CoS to Queue Mappin Figure 4 8 6 CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue Select Queue value from this drop down list e Class of Service Select CoS value from this drop down list 196 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Appl Ee Click to apply changes B CoS Mapping C
301. th the wall surface Step 3 Screw the bolts into the conductor pipe The Wall mount Managed Switch is between bolts and conductor pipe as shown below Puer unication 35 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series B To install the Wall mount Managed Switch on a magnetic surface simply follow the following diagram 2 2 2 DIN rail Mount Installation The DIN rail kit is included in the package When the wall mount application for the Wall mount Managed Switch needs to be replaced with DIN rail application please refer to the following figures to screw the DIN rail on the Wall mount Managed Switch To hang up the Wall mount Managed Switch follow the steps below Step 1 Screw the DIN rail on the Wall mount Managed Switch 36 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Step 2 Lightly insert the button of DIN rail into the track 37 m m e PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Managed Switch as the Figure 2 1 7 shows MGB SX LX 1000Base SX LX LC Fiber Figure 2 1 7 Plug in the SFP transceiver
302. the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled The 802 1X Guest VLAN setting screens in Figure 4 9 7 amp Figure 4 9 8 appear Guest VLAN Setting Guest VLAN ID NN Enable Guest VLAN port Setting Port Select Guest VLAM Apply Figure 4 9 7 Guest VLAN Setting Page Screenshot 219 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The page includes the following fields Buttons Apply Object Description e Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4094 e Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality B When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN B When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN Port When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given Setting port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the
303. the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer 120 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 Q in Q VLAN Tunnel MAN Service Provider Domain VLAN 1 20 E Core Switch sac Und om MAN Edge Switch VLAN 1 30 i Customer B a LAN Headquarters lODOBase T UTP 1O00Base SX LX Fiber optic E en DO a es e e wem Fa e e es Fe Fe es Sea es Fe Ss em es The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripp
304. tion from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options B Circuit ID option 1 B Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan id module id port no The parameter of vlan id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in switch it means switch ID The parameter of port no is the fourth byte and it means the port number After enabling DHCP snooping the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission The DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 44 amp Figure 4 9 45 appear Option82 Global Setting Remote ID 9Default O User Define o Apply Figure 4 9 44 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e State Set the option2 remote ID option content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets B Default means the default VLAN MAC format B User Define mea
305. to the root a A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch H Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUS take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to fu
306. tring when send SNMP trap packet e UDP Port Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port the port range is 1 65535 e Time Out Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 1 to 300 78 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication e Retries Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 1 to 255 Buttons Add Click to add a new SNMPv3 host entry SNMPv3 Host Status Figure 4 2 34 SNMPv3 Host Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Display the current server address e Notify Type Display the current notify type e User Name Display the current user name e UDP Port Display the current UDP port e Time Out Display the current time out e Retries Display the current retry times e Action Delete Delete the SNMPv3 host entry 4 2 7 9 SNMP Engine ID Configure SNMPv3 Engine ID on this page The entry index key is Engine ID The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host The SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4 2 35 amp Figure 4 2 36 appear Engine ID Settings Use Default Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 2 35 SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot 19 Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series The pag
307. tting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 57 amp Figure 4 9 58 appear ARP Rate Limit Setting Select Ports Default User Define up ta 50 pps Apply Figure 4 9 57 ARP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e State Set default or user define e Rate Limit pps Configure the rate limit for the port policer The default value is unlimited Buttons Apply Click to apply changes ARP Rate Limit Config GEA unlimited Figure 4 9 58 ARP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Rate Limit pps Display the current rate limit 257 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 9 9 IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host After receiving a packet the port looks up the key attributes including IP address MAC address and VLAN tag of the packet in the binding entries of the IP source guard If there is a matching entry the port will forward the packet Otherwise the port will abandon the packet
308. types of storm rate control H Broadcast storm rate control B Unknown Unicast storm rate control H Unknown Multicast storm rate control The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unknown unicast unknown multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screens in Figure 4 9 71 amp Figure 4 9 72 appear storm Control Setting Doeem Sears 9 Disable Select Ports drop LJ Unknown Multicast Enable Unknown Unicast feo Apply Figure 4 9 71 Storm Control Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Port State Enable or disable the storm control status for the given storm type e Action Configures the action performed when storm control is over rate on a port Valid values are Shutdown or Drop Type Enable The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here B broadcast B unknown unicast B unknown multicast Rate kbps pps Configure the rate for the storm control The default value is 10 000 Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes 269 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication Storm Control Information Port Port State Broadcast Kbps Unknown Multicast Kbps Unknown Unicast Kbps orco EECH wem orco foroo sem orco wem orco abies orem wae foromo foroo wes forco se seme
309. ual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual that is incorrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Energy Saving Note of the Device This power required device does not support Standby mode operation For energy saving please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit In view of saving the energy and reducing the unnecessary power consumption it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active
310. uld be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range 45 32760 centiseconds Default 60 centiseconds The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 65 32765 centiseconds Default 1000 centiseconds e Timer settings must follow this rule et Mate Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer GVRP Informations GVRP Status Disabled LeaveAll Timeout 10000 millisecond Figure 4 5 14 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 130 PLANET Networking amp Communication Object e GVRP Status e Join Timeout e Leave Timeout e LeaveAll Timeout 4 5 11 GVRP Port Setting User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Description Display the current GVRP status Display the current join timeout parameter Display the current leave timeout parameter Display the current leaveall timeout parameter The GVRP Port Setting Status screens in Figure 4 5 15 amp Figure 4 5 16 appear Port settings PortSelect Select GVRP Enabled Registration Mode Vian Creation
311. up falls within the controlled range e When the access mode is set to deny multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled range 187 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 7 7 1 Multicast Profile Setting The Add Profile and Profile Status screens in Figure 4 7 36 amp Figure 4 7 37 appear Add Frofile Permit Deny Add Figure 4 7 36 Add Profile Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Type Select IPv4 or IPv6 from this drop down list e Profile Index Indicates the ID of this particular profile e Group from Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile Specify a multicast group range by entering a start IP address e Group to Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile Specify a multicast group range by entering an end IP address e Action Sets the access mode of the profile either permit or deny Multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range Deny When the access mode is set to multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled range Buttons Add Click to add multicast profile entry IGMP Profile Status Group from Figure 4 7 37 IGMP MLD Profile Status Page Screenshot 188 e PLANET i l User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking
312. urrent configuration revision 149 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 6 3 STP Port Setting User s Manual of WGS Managed Series This page allows you to configure per port STP settings The STP Port Setting screens in Figure 4 6 6 amp Figure 4 6 7 appear STP Port Setting External Path Cost Port Select 0 Auto Edge Port BPDU Filter BPDU Guard P2P MAC Migrate Apply Figure 4 6 6 STP Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port Select e External Cost 0 Auto e Edge Port e BPDU Filter e BPDU Guard e P2P MAC e Migrate Description Select port number from this drop down list Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as being set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUSs Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The
313. uttons Apply Click to apply changes B QoS Information DE Informations Information Name Information Value Figure 4 8 13 QoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trust Mode Display the current QoS mode 201 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 8 3 2 Port Settings The QoS Port Setting and Status screen in Figure 4 8 14 amp Figure 4 8 15 appear QoS Port Setting Port Trust Select Ports 9 Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 8 14 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Trust Mode Enable or disable the trust mode Buttons Apply Click to apply changes QoS Port Status SFA enabled L AGB enabled Figure 4 8 15 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Trust Mode Display the current trust type 202 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 8 4 Rate Limit Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page 4 8 4 1 Ingress Bandwidth Control This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble The Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 16 amp Figure 4 8 17 appear Ingress Bandwidth C
314. uttons Apply Click to transmit ICMPv6 packets 318 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 14 RMON RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP RMON is a set of MIB definitions used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets MID of RMON consists of 10 groups The switch supports the most frequently used group 1 2 3 and 9 M Statistics Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent M History Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics B Alarm Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON Agent records B Event Alist of all events generated by RMON Agent Alarm depends on the implementation of Event Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network and provide some alerts upon abnormal events sending Trap or record in logs 4 14 1 RMON Statistics This page provides a Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry RMON Statistics screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears Port GEI RMON Statistics Port Clear p Fragments far SCS C dg S CEE p RMON Counters
315. v6 static gateway Display the current DHCPv6 client status 57 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series 4 2 4 User Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users and privilege type Currently the only way to login as another user on the Web server is to close and reopen the browser After the setup is completed please press Apply button to take effect Please login Web interface with a new user name and password the screens in Figure 4 2 6 amp Figure 4 2 7 appear New User User Name P L Ie Password Type Password Retype Password Privilege Type Apply Figure 4 2 6 Local User Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Username The name identifying the user Maximum length 32 characters Maximum number of users 8 e Password Type The password type for the user e Password Enter the user s new password here Range 0 32 characters plain text case sensitive e Retype Password Please enter the user s new password here again to confirm e Privilege Type The privilege type for the user Options e Admin e User e Other Buttons Apply Click to apply changes User Name Password Type Privilege Type Privilege Value Figure 4 2 7 Local User Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 58 d PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication Object Description e Username Display the cu
316. via DHCP snooping m Filtering rules are implemented as follows 238 e PLANET y User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication If the global DHCP snooping is disabled all DHCP packets are forwarded B If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table B If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but the port is not trusted it is processed as follows gt If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped gt If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RELEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled However if MAC address verification is enabled then the packet will only be forwarded if the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped m if a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering crite
317. vironments like traffic centers shopping malls railway stations warehouses airports and production facilities for the most demanding Ty outdoor surveillance applications Electrician is not needed to install AC sockets 30 watts Since the WGS PoE Managed Switch Series per PoE port supports 48 56V DC PoE power output please check and assure the Powered Device s PD acceptable DC power range is 48 56V DC otherwise it will damage the Powered Device PD 329 d PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 15 2 System Configuration In a power over Ethernet system operating power is applied from a power source PSU power supply unit over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices PDs which are connected to ports Under some conditions the total output power required by PDs can exceed the maximum available power provided by the PSU The system with a PSU is capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the PoE ports in the system In order to maintain the function of the majority of the ports power management is implemented The PSU input power consumption is monitored by measuring voltage and current The input power consumption is equal to the system s aggregated power consumption The power management concept allows all ports to be active and activates additional ports as long as the aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at w
318. working amp Communication 4 6 6 MST Instance Configuration This page allows the user to configure MST Instance Configuration The MST Instance Setting Information and Status screens in Figure 4 6 12 Figure 4 6 13 amp Figure 4 6 14 appear MST Instance Setting Priority Apply Figure 4 6 12 MST Instance Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTIID Allow to assign MSTI ID The range for the MSTI ID is 1 15 e VLANList 1 4096 Allow to assign VLAN list to special MSTI ID The range for the VLAN list is 1 4094 e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Buttons Appl PP Click to apply changes MST Instance Setting Information Figure 4 6 13 MSTI Instance Setting Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI Display the current MSTI entry e Status Display the current MSTI status 157 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Melworking amp Communication e VLAN List Display the current VLAN list e VLAN Count Display the current VLAN count e Priority Display the current MSTI priority MST Instance Status Information Name Information Value Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge Remainging Hops
319. xkx ui cwxve usado eYsuS ua ipEC ieu i EE a Ew bU RR EE vU FX A v ru Ra Ray Fu S tud wid dici e via e waa RF 348 e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 1 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing PLANET WGS Managed Switch series which comes with multiple Gigabit Ethernet copper and SFP fiber optic connectibility and robust layer 2 and layer 4 features The description of this model is shown below WGS 804HPT Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T Wall mount Managed Switch with 4 Port PoE 40 75 degrees C WGS 4215 8T Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T Wall mount Managed Switch 40 75 degrees C Where TAERAA Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Wall mount Managed Switch 40 75 degrees C Managed Switch is used as an alternative name in this user s manual 1 1 Packet Contents Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items Model Name WGS 804HPT WGS 4215 8T WGS 4215 8T2S The e Switch RB Ri 98 3 pin Terminal Block Connector Wall mounted Kit If any item is found missing or damaged please contact your local reseller for replacement 10 PLANET User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Wetwarking amp Communication 1 2 Product Description Easily deployed and Expanded Network Designed to be installed in a wall enclosure or simply mounted on a wall at any convenient location PLANET WGS managed series an
320. y the current ping result Buttons Apply Click to transmit ICMPv6 packets 317 p i e PLAN T User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 13 5 Trace Router Traceroute function is for testing the gateways through which the data packets travel from the source device to the destination device so to check the network accessibility and locate the network failure Execution procedure of the Traceroute function consists of first a data packet with TTL at 1 is sent to the destination address if the first hop returns an ICMP error message to inform this packet can not be sent due to TTL timeout a data packet with TTL at 2 will be sent Also the send hop may bea TTL timeout return but the procedure will carries on till the data packet is sent to its destination These procedures is for recording every source address which returned ICMP TTL timeout message so to describe a path the IP data packets traveled to reach the destination The Trace Route Setting screen in Figure 4 13 5 appears Trace Route Setting IP re 152 168 1100 X X X X ar hostname Max Hop 0 2 255 Default 30 Trace Route Results Apply Figure 4 13 5 Trace Route Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Max Hop The maximum gateway number allowed by traceroute function e Trace Route Results Display the current trace route result B
321. ype E dit Click to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 224 User s Manual of WGS Managed Series PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 9 3 TACACS Server This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4 9 13 Figure 4 9 14 amp Figure 4 9 15 appear Use Default Parameters jon Version 5 Yersion 4 Key String fs 0 63 ASCH Alphanumeric Characters Used sec Range 1 30 Default 5 Figure 4 9 13 Guest VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Key String The secret key up to 63 characters long shared between the TACACS server and the switch e Timeout for Reply Retransmit is the number of times in the range 1 to 30 a TACACS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead Buttons Apply HE Click to apply changes New Tacacst Server ition By IP address OBy name 0 65535 server Timeout Muse Default 1 30 secs er Priority 0 65535 Add Figure 4 9 14 New Radius Server Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 225 Networking amp Communication Object e Server Definition e Server IP e Server Port e Server Key e Server Timeout e Server Pri
322. ys the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the ports Bandwidth utilization statistics can be viewed using a line graph The Bandwidth Utilization screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears To view the port utilization click on the Port Management folder and then the Bandwidth Utilization link Bonn gau socowoos ioun nt Down Refresh period 5 v sec IFG Enable e Tx GE1 DES GEZ GE4 GES GER GE GES GEO GE10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rx GEI GE2 GE3 GE4 wes GEG GEI GER GE9 GE10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 3 7 Port Bandwidth Utilization Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Refresh Period This shows the period interval between last and next refresh Options B 2sec B 5sec B 10sec e IFG Allow user to enable or disable this function 89 PLANET d User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Networking amp Communication 4 3 4 Port Mirroring Configure port Mirroring on this page This function provides monitoring of network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Managed Switch can unobtrusiv
323. ystem Name Display the current system name 53 Buttons Edit Click to edit parameter 4 2 2 IP Configurations Networking amp Communication System Location System Contact MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Loader Version Loader Date Firmware Version Firmware Date System Object ID System Up Time PCN HW Version User s Manual of WGS Managed Series Display the current system location Display the current system contact The MAC address of this Managed Switch The IP address of this Managed Switch The subnet mask of this Managed Switch The gateway of this Managed Switch The loader version of this Managed Switch The loader date of this Managed Switch The firmware version of this Managed Switch The firmware date of this Managed Switch The system object ID of the Managed Switch The period of time the device has been operational The hardware version of this Managed Switch The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill out the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screens in Figure 4 2 2 amp Figure 4 2 3 appear IP Address Setting 9 Static CODHCP 144 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 oe 168 1254 66 95 11 68 95 192 Apply The page includes the following fields Figure 4 2 2 IP Address Setting Page Screenshot o4 User s Manua

User`s Manual - PLANET Technology Corporation.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents